ORDER NO.

ARP3455
PDP-5010FD

PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM

PDP-5010FD
THIS MANUAL IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING MODEL(S) AND TYPE(S).
Model
PDP-5010FD PDP-5010FD KUC

Type
KUCXC AC 120 V AC 120 V

Power Requirement

Remarks

For details, refer to "Important Check Points for good servicing".

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, 9120 Melsele, Belgium PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936

PIONEER CORPORATION 2007
T-IZS-001 JULY 2007 Printed in Japan

1

2

3

4

SAFETY INFORMATION

A

This service manual is intended for qualified service technicians ; it is not meant for the casual do-it-yourselfer. Qualified technicians have the necessary test equipment and tools, and have been trained to properly and safely repair complex products such as those covered by this manual. Improperly performed repairs can adversely affect the safety and reliability of the product and may void the warranty. If you are not qualified to perform the repair of this product properly and safely, you should not risk trying to do so and refer the repair to a qualified service technician.
WARNING This product contains lead in solder and certain electrical parts contain chemicals which are known to the state of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Health & Safety Code Section 25249.6 - Proposition 65

B

NOTICE (FOR CANADIAN MODEL ONLY) Fuse symbols (fast operating fuse) and/or be of identical designation.

(slow operating fuse) on PCB indicate that replacement parts must

C

REMARQUE (POUR MODÈLE CANADIEN SEULEMENT) Les symboles de fusible (fusible de type rapide) et/ou de remplacement doivent avoir la même désignation.

(fusible de type lent) sur CCI indiquent que les pièces

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NOTICE : Comply with all cautions and safety related notes located on or inside the cabinet and on the chassis. The following precautions should be observed : 1. When service is required, even though the PDP UNIT an isolation transformer should be inserted between the power line and the set in safety before any service is performed. 2. When replacing a chassis in the set, all the protective devices must be put back in place, such as barriers, nonmetallic knobs, adjustment and compartment covershields, isolation resistorcapacitor, etc. 3. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extra precaution should be taken to assure correct lead dress in the high voltage circuitry area. 4. Always use the manufacture's replacement components. Especially critical components as indicated on the circuit diagram should not be replaced by other manufacture's. Furthermore where a short circuit has occurred, replace those components that indicate evidence of overheating. 5. Before returning a serviced set to the customer, the service technician must thoroughly test the unit to be certain that it is completely safe to operate without danger of electrical shock, and be sure that no protective device built into the set by the manufacture has become defective, or inadvertently defeated during servicing. Therefore, the following checks should be performed for the continued protection of the customer and servicetechnician. 6. Perform the following precautions against unwanted radiation and rise in internal temperature. • Always return the internal wiring to the original styling. • Attach parts (Gascket, Ferrite Core, Ground, Rear Cover, Shield Case etc.) surely after disassembly. 7. Perform the following precautions for the PDP panel. • When the front case is removed, make sure nothing hits the panel face, panel corner, and panel edge (so that the glass does not break). • Make sure that the panel vent does not break. (Check that the cover is attached.) • Handle the FPC connected to the panel carefully. Twisting or pulling the FPC when connecting it to the connector will cause it to peel off from the panel. 8. Pay attention to the following. • Pay extreme caution when the front case and rear panel are removed because this may cause a high risk of disturbance to TVs and radios in the surrounding.

D

E

F

2
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Leakage Current Cold Check
With the AC plug removed from an AC power source, place a jumper across the two plug prongs. Turn the AC power switch on. Using an insulation tester (DC 500V), connect one lead to the jumpered AC plug and touch the other lead to each exposed metal part (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, control shafts, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis. Exposed metal parts having a return path to the chassis should have a minimum resistor reading of 4 MΩ. The below 4 MΩ resistor value indicate an abnormality which require corrective action. Exposed metal parts not having a return path to the chassis will indicate an open circuit.

A

PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE
Many electrical and mechanical parts in PIONEER set have special safety related characteristics. These are often not evident from visual inspection nor the protection afforded by them necessarily can be obtained by using replacement components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which have these special safety characteristics are identified in this Service Manual. Electrical components having such features are identified by marking with a > on the schematics and on the parts list in this Service Manual. The use of a substitute replacement component which dose not have the same safety characteristics as the PIONEER recommended replacement one, shown in the parts list in this Service Manual, may create shock, fire or other hazards. Product Safety is continuously under review and new instructions are issued from time to time. For the latest information, always consult the current PIONEER Service Manual. A subscription to, or additional copies of, PIONEER Service Manual may be obtained at a nominal charge from PIONEER.

B

Leakage Current Hot Check
Plug the AC line cord directly into an AC power source (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Turn the AC power switch on. U s i n g a " L e a k a g e C u r r e n t Te s t e r ( S i m p s o n M o d e l 2 2 9 equivalent)", measure for current from all exposed metal parts of the cabinet (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, control shaft, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis, to a known earth ground (water pipe, conduit, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 1 mA.

C

Device under test Test all exposed metal surfaces

Reading should Leakage not be above current 1 mA tester

D

Also test with plug reversed (Using AC adapter plug as required)

Earth ground

AC Leakage Test
A N Y M E A S U R E M E N T S N OT W I T H I N T H E L I M I T S OUTLINED ABOVE ARE INDICATIVE OF A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD AND MUST BE CORRECTED BEFORE RETURNING THE SET TO THE CUSTOMER.
E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

3

1

2

3

4

A

[Important Check Points for Good Servicing]
In this manual, procedures that must be performed during repairs are marked with the below symbol. Please be sure to confirm and follow these procedures.

1. Product safety
Please conform to product regulations (such as safety and radiation regulations), and maintain a safe servicing environment by following the safety instructions described in this manual. 1 Use specified parts for repair. Use genuine parts. Be sure to use important parts for safety.
B

2 Do not perform modifications without proper instructions. Please follow the specified safety methods when modification(addition/change of parts) is required due to interferences such as radio/TV interference and foreign noise. 3 Make sure the soldering of repaired locations is properly performed. When you solder while repairing, please be sure that there are no cold solder and other debris. Soldering should be finished with the proper quantity. (Refer to the example) 4 Make sure the screws are tightly fastened. Please be sure that all screws are fastened, and that there are no loose screws. 5 Make sure each connectors are correctly inserted.

C

Please be sure that all connectors are inserted, and that there are no imperfect insertion. 6 Make sure the wiring cables are set to their original state. Please replace the wiring and cables to the original state after repairs. In addition, be sure that there are no pinched wires, etc. 7 Make sure screws and soldering scraps do not remain inside the product. Please check that neither solder debris nor screws remain inside the product. 8 There should be no semi-broken wires, scratches, melting, etc. on the coating of the power cord. Damaged power cords may lead to fire accidents, so please be sure that there are no damages. If you find a damaged power cord, please exchange it with a suitable one.

D

9 There should be no spark traces or similar marks on the power plug. When spark traces or similar marks are found on the power supply plug, please check the connection and advise on secure connections and suitable usage. Please exchange the power cord if necessary. a Safe environment should be secured during servicing. When you perform repairs, please pay attention to static electricity, furniture, household articles, etc. in order to prevent injuries. Please pay attention to your surroundings and repair safely.

2. Adjustments
To keep the original performance of the products, optimum adjustments and confirmation of characteristics within specification. Adjustments should be performed in accordance with the procedures/instructions described in this manual.
E

3. Lubricants, Glues, and Replacement parts
Use grease and adhesives that are equal to the specified substance. Make sure the proper amount is applied.

4. Cleaning
For parts that require cleaning, such as optical pickups, tape deck heads, lenses and mirrors used in projection monitors, proper cleaning should be performed to restore their performances.

5. Shipping mode and Shipping screws
F

To protect products from damages or failures during transit, the shipping mode should be set or the shipping screws should be installed before shipment. Please be sure to follow this method especially if it is specified in this manual.

4
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

CONTENTS
SAFETY INFORMATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 2 1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS.................................................................................................................................................... 7 1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING ............................................................................................................................................... 7 1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT ............................................................................. 8 2. SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 9 2.1 ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................................................................................. 9 2.2 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 10 2.3 PANEL FACILITIES....................................................................................................................................................... 11 3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE ............................................................................................................................................ 14 3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING ......................................................................................................................... 14 3.2 QUICK REFERENCE ................................................................................................................................................... 15 3.3 PCB LOCATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 17 3.4 JIGS LIST ..................................................................................................................................................................... 18 3.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 4. BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................................................................. 20 4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)............................................................................................................................. 20 4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)............................................................................................................................. 22 4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) .............................................................................................................................. 24 4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) .............................................................................................................................. 26 4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................................................................ 28 4.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY...................................................................................................................................................... 29 4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS ......................................................................................................... 30 4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS ................................................ 31 4.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS................................................................................................................................... 32 4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY .................................................................................................................................................... 33 4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM)....................................................................................................................... 34 4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY.................................................................................................................. 36 4.13 TANSHI ASSY ............................................................................................................................................................ 38 4.14 50FHD LED and FHD IR ASSYS ............................................................................................................................... 39 4.15 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of FHD RLS and SIDE KEY ASSYS ................................................................................ 40 5. DIAGNOSIS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 41 5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION.................................................................................................................................... 41 5.1.1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION............................................................................................................................... 41 5.1.2 POWER ON SEQUENCE ...................................................................................................................................... 42 5.1.3 DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE................................................................................................................. 43 5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................. 45 5.2.1 WHOLE UNIT......................................................................................................................................................... 45 5.2.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT.......................................................................................................................................... 47 5.2.3 DRIVE ASSY.......................................................................................................................................................... 48 5.2.4 DIGITAL ASSY ....................................................................................................................................................... 52 5.2.5 MAIN ASSY............................................................................................................................................................ 53 5.2.6 VIDEO SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................... 54 5.2.7 AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................... 60 5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN) ........................................................................................................................ 63 5.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL .......................................................................................... 63 5.3.2 PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS ................................................................................ 64 5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN) ............................................................................................................................. 67 5.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL ............................................................................................... 67 5.4.2 SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSIS ............................................................................................................................. 68 5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION .................................................................................................................................... 70 5.5.1 INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE .......................................................... 70 5.5.2 FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL ................................................................................. 73 5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 74 5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF FUNCTION ..................................................................................................... 74 5.6.2 SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL............................................................................................................ 75 5.6.3 PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY ........................................................................................................................ 76 5.6.4 TRAP SWITCH....................................................................................................................................................... 79
A

B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

5

1

2

3

4

A

B

C

D

E

6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE................................................................................................................................................80 6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE ..........................................................................................................80 6.1.1 SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART...............................................................................................80 6.1.2 HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE .............................................................................................80 6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE .....................................................................81 6.1.4 REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE ................................................................................82 6.1.5 PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL .....................................................................................................................83 6.1.6 FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE .......................................................................................................................84 6.1.7 INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE ......................................................................................................86 6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU ....................................................................................................................................88 6.2.1 INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................................................88 6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) .............................................................................................................................................98 6.2.3 OPTION ................................................................................................................................................................108 6.2.4 INITIALIZE ............................................................................................................................................................109 7. DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................................................................................112 7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER FOR THE MAIN PARTS AND BOARDS .......................................................112 7.2 DISASSEMBLY ...........................................................................................................................................................113 7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM.....................................................121 8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................................................................122 8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED ........................................................122 8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY) ...........................................................................................................124 8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA ..............................................................................................................................127 8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED .......................................................................128 8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED ..................................................................................141 8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT......................................................................144 9. RS-232C............................................................................................................................................................................145 9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND...........................................................................................................................145 9.1.1 PREPARED TOOLS .............................................................................................................................................145 9.1.2 USING RS-232C COMMANDS ............................................................................................................................145 9.2 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................146 9.3 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................................155 9.3.1 QS1 (PANEL STATUS) .........................................................................................................................................155 9.3.2 QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA) ........................................................................................................................156 9.3.3 QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL) ..................................................................................................................157 9.3.4 QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA) .....................................................................................................................158 9.3.5 QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL) .........................................................................................159 9.3.6 QPM (PULSE METER VALUE) ............................................................................................................................159 9.3.7 QPD (PD LOGS) ..................................................................................................................................................160 9.3.8 QSD (SD LOGS) ..................................................................................................................................................161 9.3.9 QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION) ..............................................................................................162 9.3.10 QMT (TEMPERATURE / FAN ROTATION / ROOM LIGHT SENSOR) ...............................................................162 9.3.11 QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB)...................................................................................................163 9.3.12 QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA)................................................................................................................................165 9.3.13 DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF) ..........................................................................................................165 9.3.14 FAY / FAN (ADJ. COMMANDS PERMISSION / PROHIBITION) ........................................................................166 9.3.15 FAJ / UAJ / CBU / BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE) ...................................................166 10. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST...........................................................................................................................168 10.1 PACKING SECTION .................................................................................................................................................168 10.2 REAR SECTION .......................................................................................................................................................170 10.3 FRONT SECTION.....................................................................................................................................................172 10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) .........................................................................................................................................174 10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) .........................................................................................................................................176 10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION .....................................................................................................................................178 10.7 MULTI BASE SECTION ............................................................................................................................................180 10.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F (AWU1272)...................................................................................................................182 10.9 TABLE TOP STAND ..................................................................................................................................................184 10.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) ............................................................................................................................185 10.11 CS ASSY ................................................................................................................................................................186

F

6
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING
A

• For environmental protection, lead-free solder is used on the printed circuit boards mounted in this unit. Be sure to use lead-free solder and a soldering iron that can meet specifications for use with lead-free solders for repairs accompanied by reworking of soldering. • Compared with conventional eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher melting points, by approximately 40 °C. Therefore, for lead-free soldering, the tip temperature of a soldering iron must be set to around 373 °C in general, although the temperature depends on the heat capacity of the PC board on which reworking is required and the weight of the tip of the soldering iron. Compared with eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher bond strengths but slower wetting times and higher melting temperatures (hard to melt/easy to harden). The following lead-free solders are available as service parts: • Parts numbers of lead-free solder: GYP1006 1.0 in dia. GYP1007 0.6 in dia. GYP1008 0.3 in dia.
B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

7

1

2

3

4

1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT

A

Charged Section
The places where the commercial AC power is used without passing through the power supply transformer. If the places are touched, there is a risk of electric shock. In addition, the measuring equipment can be damaged if it is connected to the GND of the charged section and the GND of the non-charged section while connecting the set directly to the commercial AC power supply. Therefore, be sure to connect the set via an insulated transformer and supply the current.

High Voltage Generating Point
The places where voltage is 100 V or more except for the charged places described above. If the places are touched, there is a risk of electric shock. The VSUS voltage remains for several minutes after the power to the unit is turned off. These places must not be touched until about 10 minutes after the power is turned off, or it is confirmed with a tester that there is no residual VSUS voltage. If the procedures described in “5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF FUNCTION” are performed before the power is turned off, the voltage will be discharged in about 30 seconds. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................... (205 V) 50F X DRIVE Assy .......................................................... (205 V) 50F Y DRIVE Assy ......................................... (−270 V to 400 V) 50F SCAN A Assy .......................................... (−270 V to 400 V) 50F SCAN B Assy ........................................... (−270 V to 400 V) 50F SCAN C Assy ........................................... (−270 V to 400 V) 50F SCAN D Assy ........................................... (−270 V to 400 V)

B

1. Power Cord 2. AC Inlet 3. Power Switch 4. Fuse (In the POWER SUPPLY Unit) 5. STB Transformer and Converter Transformer (In the POWER SUPPLY Unit) 6. Other primary side of the POWER SUPPLY Unit

C

: Part is Charged Section. : Part is the High Voltage Generating Points other than the Charged Section.

50F Y DRIVE Assy

POWER SUPPLY Unit

50F X DRIVE Assy

Conductive plate X

D

E

F

50F SCAN D Assy

50F SCAN C Assy

50F SCAN B Assy

50F SCAN A Assy

AC inlet

Power switch

Fig. High Voltage Generating Point (Rear view)
8
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 ACCESSORIES
A

Remote control unit (AXD1550)

Band assy (AXY1192) Screw: ×2 (M4×10 mm) (for plastic bands) Plastic band: ×2

B

Alkaline dry cell battery (LR6, AA) Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet) (ADG1215)

Binder Assy (AEC1908) Speed clamp: ×3 Bead band: ×3
C

Speaker accessories
Speaker cable: ×2 (SDS1202) Cleaning cloth (AED1285)

Bracket Assy (S): ×2 (SXG1127)
D

Warranty card Brackets for side: ×2

Operating instructions (PDP-5010FD/KUCXC) (ARE1472)

Bracket Assy (C) (SXG1128)

E

Brackets for center

Operating instructions (PDP-5010FD/KUC) (ARE1487)

Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm: Black): ×9 (BMZ50P100FTB)

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

9

1

2

3

4

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

A
Item
Number of pixel Audio Amplifier Speakers Sound Effect Power Requirement Weight 1920 × 1080 pixels 17 W + 17 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω) Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 442 W (26 W Standby) Main unit: 38.5 kg (84.9 lbs.) Stand: 2.2 kg (4.9 lbs.) (including bolts) Speaker system: 3.3 kg (7.3 lbs.) (including cables, mounting fittings and screws) Total: 44.0 kg (97 lbs.) ATSC Digital TV system 8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation VHF/UHF CATV Audio format Reception System (Analog) Circuit type Tuner VHF/UHF CATV Audio multiplex Terminals Rear ANT/CABLE A IN ANT B IN INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 4 PC INPUT INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69 Ch. 2 to 135 Dolby Digital American TV standard NTSC system Video signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital Synthesizer system VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69 ANT/CABLE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125 BTSC system 75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UHF/CATV in 75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for VHF/UHF/CATV in S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in HDMI in*, AUDIO in Analog RGB in, AUDIO in HDMI in*, AUDIO in HDMI in* HDMI in* AUDIO out (Fixed) Optical 1 6 Ω to 16 Ω Variable Point of Deployment COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in 16 Ω to 32 Ω recommended USB in** English/French/Spanish

B

Reception System (Digital) Circuit type Tuner

C

D

CONTROL OUT SPEAKERS SUB WOOFER CableCARD Side INPUT 3 PHONES USB On-screen display languages

*

E

This conforms to HDMI1.3 and HDCP1.1. HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both video and audio using a single cable. HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital contents that use the Digital Visual Interface (DVI). ** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0 . • Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions
1232 (48-1/2) 120 (4-23/32)

F

80 (3-5/32)

550 (21-21/32)

850 (33-15/32) 300 (11-13/16)

722 (28-7/16)

Unit: mm (inch)

10
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

2.3 PANEL FACILITIES
A

Front Section
Side Side

12 13 14 15 16

7 8 9 10 11
B

ON STANDBY SLEEP

2 3 4

C

1

5

6

D

1

2 3 4 5 6 7

button (This button is located on the bottom on the rear panel (see 1 on Rear section). If the button is off, the power will not turn on even when TV on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON on the plasma display is pressed. To turn on the power, press ). POWER ON indicator STANDBY indicator SLEEP indicator Room Light Sensor Remote control sensor STANDBY/ON button1

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

INPUT button (ENTER button*) VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN buttons*) CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/RIGHT buttons*) TV GUIDE button* USB port PHONES output terminal INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB, PR) INPUT 3 terminal (VIDEO) INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO)

E

The buttons with asterisks (*) can operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

11

1

2

3

4

A

Rear Section

4

5

B

19 13 14 15
C
4

20 21
5
4 5

16 17 18 25 24

22 23

26 2 3

27 4

1

5 6 7 8
D

9

10 11

12

* For exact terminal positions, refer to the terminal position sheet located near the terminal compartment.

E

F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12

button CableCARD™ slot ANT/CABLE A IN terminal AC IN terminal INPUT 4 terminal (HDMI) INPUT 5 terminal (HDMI) INPUT 6 terminal (HDMI) INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI) PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) CONTROL OUT terminal RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) ANT B IN terminal INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) SUB WOOFER terminal AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB, PPR) 25 SPEAKERS (R/L) terminals 26 SPEAKERS (R) terminal (Speaker side) 27 SPEAKERS (L) terminal (Speaker side)

PDP-5010FD
1 2 3 4

5

6

7

8

Remote Control Unit
This section describes the functions of the buttons available when the mode switch has been set to TV. 1 TV : Turns on the power to the plasma display or places it into standby mode. 2 Transmission confirmation LED 3 INPUT: Selects an input source of the plasma display. (“INPUT1”, “INPUT 2 ”, “INPUT3”, “INPUT4”, “INPUT5”, “INPUT6” and “INPUT 7 ”) 4 SCREEN SIZE: Selects the screen size. 5 AV SELECTION: Selects audio and video settings. (AV source: OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER. PC source: STANDARD, USER.) 6 INFO: Displays a channel banner when a TV program is being watched. When the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation, displays information about the currently highlighted channel (if available). 7 HOME MENU: Displays the HOME MENU screen. MENU: Displays a panel menu when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation. 8 DAY +/–: Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings in the TV Guide On Screen™ Listing service. 9 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen. 10 HDMI CONTROL: Displays the HDMI Control menu. 11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D): Selects any of the four preset channels. While watching, you can toggle the set channels by pressing A, B, C and D. 12 0 to 9: Selects the channel. 13 • (dot): Enters a dot. 14 CH +/–: Selects the channel. 15 SPLIT: Switches the screen mode among 2-screen, picture-inpicture, and single-screen. 16 FREEZE: Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function. 17 MTS: Selects MTS/SAP or language depending on the program being watched. 18 ANT: Selects the antenna (A, B). 19 PC: Selects the PC terminal as an input source. 20 DISPLAY: Displays the channel information. 21 TV GUIDE: Displays the TV Guide On Screen™ system. 22 ENTER: Executes a command. 23 PAGE +/– (for the TV Guide On Screen™ system): Scrolls the program listing screen vertically. 24 RETURN: Returns to the previous menu screen. 25 CH ENTER: Executes a channel number. 26 CH RETURN: Returns to the previous channel. This button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™ system is displayed. 27 VOL +/–: Sets the volume. 28 MUTING: Mutes the sound. 29 SHIFT: Moves the location of the small screen when in the picture-in-picture mode. 30 SWAP: Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode. Luminous remote control buttons All buttons on the remote control unit are luminous and gather and store light. This enables quick access to the desired function when performing operations in dark places.

A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 24 18 19 20 21 22 23

B

C

12

13

25 26 27 28

D

14

15 16 17

29 30

E

Mode switch (with “TV” selected)
Note
• When using the remote control unit, point it at the plasma display.
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

13

1

2

3

4

3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE
3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING
A

Items to be checked after repair (PDP)
To ensure the quality of the product after repair, check the recommended items shown below: No.
1 2 3

Procedures

Item to be checked

Check if all the symptoms pointed out by the customer have been The symptoms in question must not be reproduced. addressed. Connect the peripheral equipment. Check the video and audio. Check the buttons and controls. Check the cabinet. Connect all external peripheral equipment as originally connected and check if the connections are correct. Tune in to the stations that the customer would normally receive and check if video and audio are normal. Use the buttons and controls on the remote control unit and main unit and check if they operate properly. Check for any scratches or dirt that have been made or attached on the cabinet after receiving the product for repair.

B

4 5

See the table below for the items to be checked regarding video and audio: Item to be checked regarding video
Block noise Horizontal noise
C

Item to be checked regarding audio
Distortion Noise Volume too low Volume too high Volume fluctuating Sound interrupted

Dot noise Disturbed image (video jumpiness) Too dark Too bright Mottled color

D

E

F

14
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

3.2 QUICK REFERENCE
Quick Reference upon Service Visit 1 Notes, PD/SD diagnosis, and methods for various settings
Notes when visiting for service
1. Notes when disassembling/reassembling
1 Rear case
Panel section

A

PD/SD

When reassembling the rear case, the screws must be tightened in a specific order. Be careful not to tighten them in the wrong order forcibly. For details, see "Rear Case" in "7. DISASSEMBLY".

Item
SQ_LSI Communication with the module IIC DIGITAL-RST2 Panel high temperature Audio/ Short-circuit SP terminal Communication with the Module UCOM Main 3-wire serial communication MTB section Main IIC communication Communication with the Main UCOM FAN Unit high temperature Digital Tuner communication MTB-RST2/RST4 Home Media Gallery Main EEPROM

No. of LEDs flashing Red Blue
Blue 1 Blue 2 Blue 3 Blue 4 Blue 5 Blue 6 Blue 7 Blue 8 Blue 9

LED Display Information
1 TRAP SW 2 Rewriting software 3 PD (2-15) 4 SD (1-15) 5 No backup

2 Attaching screws for the HDMI connector
When attaching the HDMI connector after replacing the Main Assy, secure the HDMI connector manually with a screwdriver, but not with an electric screwdriver. If you tighten the screws too tightly with an electric screwdriver, the screw heads may be damaged, in which case the screws cannot be untightened/tightened any more.

B

2. On parts replacement
1 How to discharge before replacing the Assys
A charge of significant voltage remains in the Plasma Panel even after the power is turned off. Safely discharge the panel before replacement of parts, in either manner indicated below: A: Let the panel sit at least for 3 minutes after the power is turned off. B: Turn the Large Signal System off before the power is turned off then, after 1 minute, turn the power off. For details, see "5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF FUNCTION".

Blue 10 This indication does not display all Blue 11 LED patterns. Blue 12 For details, please refer to 5.1.1 LED Blue 13 Blue 14 Blue 15 Red 2 Red 3 Red 4 Red 5 Red 6 Red 7 Red 8 Red 9 Red 10 Red 11 Red 12 Red 15

DISPLAY INFORMATION.

2 On the settings after replacement of the Assys
Some boards need settings made after replacement of the Assys. For details, see "8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT".

POWER SCAN SCN-5V Y-DRIVE Y-DCDC Y-SUS ADRS X-DRIVE X-DCDC X-SUS DIG-DCDC UNKNOWN

3. On various settings
1 Setting in Factory mode
After a Mask indication into the panel is performed, be sure to set the Mask setting to "OFF" then exit Factory mode.

C

How to locate several items on the Factory menu
{ [ " } : Item on the Factory menu ] : Key on the remote control unit " : Screen indication

Adjustments and Settings after replacement of the Assys (Procedures in Factory mode)
1. Digital Video Assy: Transfer of backup data
1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {BACKUP DATA}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [j] seven times, then press [ENTER/SET].) 2 Select {TRANSFER}, using [l], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 3 After transfer of backup data is completed, {ETC} is automatically selected, and the LED on the front panel returns to normal lighting.

D

1. Confirmation of accumulated power-on time and power-on count
Select {INFORMATION} then {HOUR METER}. (After entering Factory mode, press [j] five times.)

2. Confirmation of the Power-down and Shutdown histories
1 Panel system
PD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {POWER DOWN}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] three times.) SD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {SHUT DOWN}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] four times.)

2. MAIN Assy: Execution of FINAL SETUP.

1 Select {INITIALIZE} then {FINAL SETUP}, then press [ENTER/SET]. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] three times, then press [j] four times.) 2 Select "YES", using [l]. Then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 3 After "FINAL SETUP IS COMPLETE" is displayed on the screen, turn the POWER switch of the main unit off.

3. POWER SUPPLY Unit: Clearance of the accumulated power-on count and maximum temperature value
1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {P COUNT INFO}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [j] seven times, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] six times.) 2 Press [l] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected. Clear the maximum temperature value (MAX TEMP) in the same manner.

2 MTB section
Select {INFORMATION} then {MAIN NG}. (After entering Factory mode, press [j] three times.)

E

3. How to display the Mask indication
1 Mask indication in the panel side
1. Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {RASTER MASK SETUP}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] 8 times.) 2. Press [ENTER/SET], then select a Mask indication, using [i] or [j].

4. Other Assys: Clearance of the maximum temperature value

1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {MAX TEMP}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER], press [j] seven times, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] seven times.) 2 Press [l] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

15

1

2

3

4

A

Quick Reference upon Service Visit 2 Mode transition and structure of layers in Service Factory mode
Mode transition in Service Factory mode
Up • To shift to another mode, press [MUTING]. • To shift to another item in a specific mode, press [i] or [j]. • To shift to the next nested layer below for an item with a "(+)" indication, press [ENTER/SET]. To return to the next nested layer above, also press [ENTER/SET]. INITIALIZE mode 1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 2. FINAL SETUP 3. Wide XGA AUTO

Structure of Layers in Service Factory Mode
INFORMATION mode 1. VERSION (1) 2. VERSION (2) 3. VERSION (3) 4. MAIN NG 4-1. CLEAR 5. TEMPERATURE 6. HOUR METER 6-1. CLEAR 7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 8. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 10. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 11. DTV TUNING STATUS 1 12. DTV TUNING STATUS 2 13. DTV TUNING STATUS 3 14. DTV TV-GUIDE BER 15. DEBUG INFO PANEL FACTORY mode OPTION mode 1. EDID WRITE MODE 2. ANTENNA MODE 3. AFT 4. SYNC DET INITIALIZE mode 1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 1-1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 2. FINAL SETUP 2-1. DATA RESET 3. HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 3-1. MODE SHIFT 4. Wide XGA AUTO The software versions for each microcomputer The Flash memory versions for each device The Flash memory versions for each device The shutdown message ID/event times (Going Clear mode by [ENTER/SET] key) Select Yes by [l] key l pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key The temperature/FAN rotating status/Room Light Sensor The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information Select Yes by [l] key l pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key The information of HDMI information files The information of HDMI information files The signal information of VDEC The signal information of VDEC Detail information for DTV Detail information for DTV Detail information for DTV For production line use For factory use Refer to [PANEL FACTORY MODE]

Down INFORMATION mode 1. VERSION (1) 2. VERSION (2), (3) 3. MAIN NG 4. TEMPERATURE 5. HOUR METER 6. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 8. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 10. DTV TUNING STATUS 1, 2, 3 11. DTV TV-GUIDE BER 12. DEBUG INFO

B

C

PANEL FACTORY mode 1. PANEL INFORMATION 2. PANEL WORKS 3. POWER DOWN 4. SHUT DOWN 5. PANEL-1 ADJ 6. PANEL-2 ADJ 7. PANEL FUNCTION 8. ETC. 9. RASTER MASK SETUP 10. PATTEN MASK SETUP 11. COMBI MASK SETUP

OPTION mode 1. EDID WRITE MODE 2. ANTENNA MODE 3. AFT 4. SYNC DET

For factory use For production line use For production line use For technical analysis

For factory use Set to Factory default settings (it should perform after replacing a MAIN Assy) Information for a USB device is displayed For technical analysis

Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 1
1. PANEL INFORMATION 2. PANEL WORKS 3. POWER DOWN 4. SHUT DOWN 5. PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 1. VOL SUS 2. VOL OFFSET • • • • • 8. VOL YNOFS4 9. RESET1ST_KSB 10. RESET2ND_KSB • • • • • 23. YSTL_FMR_HZ 24. SUS FREQ Version indication of the panel Indications of the accumulated power-on time, pulse-meter count, and power-on count of the panel Indication of the Power-down history Indication of the Shutdown history

Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2
7. PANEL FUNCTION (+) 1. R-LEVEL 2. G-LEVEL 3. B-LEVEL 4. ADDRESS L1 5. ADDRESS L2 • • • • • 11. ADDRESS U4 12. STK MODE 8. ETC (+) 1. BACKUP DATA 2. DIGITAL EEPROM 3. PD INFO. 4. SD INFO. 5. HR-MTR INFO. 6. PM/B1-B5 7. P COUNT INFO. 8. MAX TEMP. 9. RASTER MASK SETUP (+) 1. MASK OFF 2. RST MASK 01 • • • • • 26. RST MASK 25 10. PATTEN MASK SETUP (+) 1. MASK OFF 2. PTN MASK 01 • • • • • 50. PTN MASK 49 11. COMBI MASK SETUP (+) 1. MASK OFF 2. CMB MASK 01 • • • • • 18. CMB MASK 17

D

Items for use by engineers

Settings required after replacement of the panel

Modification not required because these items are basically for factory presetting For AM noise prevention (Depending on the mode, brightness of the screen changes.) For confirmation of the result of the setting change, the unit must be turned off then back on again.

For transferring backup data (after replacement of the DIGITAL Assy) To clear data of the digital video For clearance of data for the corresponding items. The clearing method is the same: Select "CLEAR", using [l], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, {ETC} is automatically selected.

E

6. PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 1. R-HIGH 2. G-HIGH 3 .B-HIGH 4. R-LOW 5. G-LOW 6. B-LOW 7. ABL

Parameters for the WB adjustment of the panel, which are required during adjustment after panel replacement

For use while Raster Mask (full mask) is displayed. Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask.

Setting of the power consumption. A setting table is available for each vertical signal.

For use while Pattern Mask is displayed. Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask.

To "Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2"

For use while Combination Mask is displayed. Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask.

F

16
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

3.3 PCB LOCATION
A

Note: The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual wiring, because the product in the photo is a prototype. Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original wiring of the unit after repair work.
PANEL SENSOR Assy 50F ADDRESS L Assy 50F ADDRESS L Assy FHD FAN CONNECT Assy 50F ADDRESS S Assy

50F ADDRESS L Assy

50F SCAN A Assy

B

50F SCAN B Assy

POWER SUPPLY Unit 50F Y DRIVE Assy 50F X DRIVE Assy

SIDE KEY Assy

50F SCAN C Assy

POD Assy

MAIN Assy

SIDE IO Assy

C

50F SCAN D Assy

TANSHI Assy

50F ADDRESS S Assy

50F ADDRESS L Assy 50F DIGITAL Assy

50F ADDRESS L Assy

50F ADDRESS L Assy

FHD POWER SW Assy
D

FHD RLS Assy FHD IR Assy Bottom view

50FHD LED Assy Rear view Front view

Mark No.
NSP NSP NSP NSP NSP NSP

Description

Part No.
AWW1310 AWW1311 AWW1312 AN16174A AWW1313 AN16174A AWW1314 AN16174A AWW1315 AN16174A AWV2510 AWV2511 AWW1309 AWW1316

Mark No.
>

Description

Part No.
AWV2457 AWW1274 AWW1275 AWW1334 AWW1289 AWW1290 AWW1291 AWW1292 AWW1293 AWW1295
F E

LIST OF ASSEMBLIES
50F ADDRESS L ASSY 50F ADDRESS S ASSY 50F SCAN A ASSY IC2801 - IC2804 50F SCAN B ASSY IC2901 - IC2904 50F SCAN C ASSY IC3001 - IC3004 50F SCAN D ASSY IC3101 - IC3104 50F X DRIVE ASSY 50F Y DRIVE ASSY PANEL SENSOR ASSY 50F DIGITAL ASSY MAIN ASSY SIDE IO ASSY SIDE KEY ASSY TANSHI ASSY FHD IR ASSY FHD FAN CONNECT ASSY 50FHD LED ASSY FHD RLS ASSY FHD POWER SW ASSY POD ASSY > POWER SUPPLY UNIT PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F

AXY1168 AWU1272

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

17

1

2

3

4

3.4 JIGS LIST
Name Service Cotton Cloth Glove Jig No. GYX1002 Remarks 7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM

A

B

C

3.5 CLEANING

D

Name
Cleaning liquid Cleaning paper GEM1004 GED-008

Part No.

Remarks
Used to fan cleaning. Refer to “10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)”.

E

F

18
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

19

1

2

3

4

4. BLOCK DIAGRAM
4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
A

B

C

D

E

F

20
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B

C

D

E

When ordering service parts, be sure to refer to "EXPLODED VIEWS and PARTS LIST" or "PCB PARTS LIST". The mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part. Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation.
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

21

1

2

3

4

4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)

A

B

V+8V_AU V+3_3V_A V+3_3V_AU_D

C

D

E

F

22
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

23

1

2

3

4

4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
50F ADDRESS L ASSY
A
DRIVER IC IC1651 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1681

50F ADDRESS L ASSY
DRIVER IC IC1651 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1681

SECONDARY
+16.5V +6.5V VSUS P1
CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

+16.5V +6.5V

VADR1

VDDLS1

VADR2

VDDLS2

VADR3

VDDLS3

VADR4

VDDLS4

VADR1

VDDLS1

VADR2

VDDLS2

VADR3

VDDLS3

VADR4

VDDLS4

P2

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

+12V +5.1V +60V +12V +5.1V

V+8V

V+60V

V+3.3V

V+60V

V+8V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

V+3.3V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

P6

P7

P5

+16.5V +5.1V DRF_SW_B M_SW_DET EXT_PD VSUS_ADJ PS_PD RELAY DRF_B AC_DET PD_TRIG_B +16.5V +12V

AD2 CN1601

AD1 CN1602

AD2 CN1601

AD1 CN1602

B
P8

P4

+6.5V +5.1V STB5.1V IC202 152 STB3.3V Q203 +35V M_SW_DET AC_DET US_SW STB5.1V +12V STB3.3V AC_DET

T401 T402

50F SCAN B ASSY (HIGH-SIDE_LOW) 50F SCAN A ASSY (HIGH-SIDE_HIGH)
VH IC5V Scan Signal Scan IC IC2804 VH IC5V Scan IC IC2803 VH IC5V PSUS

P9

+B for RELAY DRIVE P10

50F Y DRIVE ASSY
Y6
+16.5V VSUS +3.3V +8V VADR

Scan IC IC2802 VH IC5V

RST-D BLOCK
VC_P VYPRST

SUS BLOCK
+16.5V

Y7
VC_S VKNOFS4 +8V +3.3V VADR

Scan IC IC2801 SA1

50F DIGITAL ASSY
V+3V_EE
SCL,SDA TEMP1

P12

D24

+3.3V +8V VADR

C

VH

IC5V

SB2

PRST BLOCK
VC_U +16.5V

KNOFS4 SOFT-G BLOCK
VSNOFS VKNOFS2 +16.5V VC_S

REG
+5.1V

REG
12V

V+2_5V_D

V+1_2V_D
RELAY2

Scan IC IC2904 VH IC5V

Vsus_ADJ PD_TRG_B, AC_DET, M_SW_DET

Y5
+5V

1.2V REG. V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D

Scan IC IC2903 VH IC5V

PSUS

RESONANCE BLOCK
VC_S VC_S

V+3_3V_D V+2_5V_D

MSK-S

VH

IC5V

SUSOUT

Scan Signal VH IC5V SB1

Gate Signal

Scan IC IC2902

SNOFS KNOFS2 BLOCK

Drive Signal

REG

+16.5V VSUS

Y2
VH IC5V

+6.5V

1.8V REG.

D21

Scan IC IC2901

Y4
+16.5V +5V

V+1_1V_D
VH_UV_PD, YDRIVE_PD, YRESNC_PD, YDD_CHV_PD, IC5V_UV_PD VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ, XKNOFS1_2_ADJ, XKNOFS3_ADJ,XKNOFS4_ADJ,

DC-DC CONVERTER BD8602FV IC3801

H-MSK

VH

IC5V

Scan Signal PSUS

L-MSK

VSUS

SC1

Scan Signal VH IC5V

Scan IC IC3004 VH IC5V

VH IC5V

SUS BLOCK

SUS PreDrive

Drive Signal

DAC

SCL, SDA

SCL, SDA DAC

Drive Signal Y3
VC_U +16.5V VSUS VYPRST VSNOFS VKNOFS1 VH

Scan IC IC3003 VH IC5V

LOGIC BLOCK

SCAN,YSUS

STOP_SQ

Scan IC IC3002 VH IC5V

PSUS

RESONANCE BLOCK

SUS BLOCK

Y1

Pulse Width MASK
ADR_PD1

SQ_NON

VSUS

Scan IC IC3001

MAIN DC/DC CONV.

ADR PD MSK

Pulse Width
ADRS PD

VKNOFS1
SC2

+16.5V

VKNOFS3

VH

IC5V

SD1

+16.5V VC_S VC_U +16.5V IC5V VC_P

Scan IC IC3104 VH IC5V Scan IC IC3103 VH IC5V Scan IC IC3102 VH IC5V

KNOFS1 KNOFS3 BLOCK
IC5V

VSUS

SUS BLOCK

15V DC/DC CONV. Scan Signal

IC5V/VF DC/DC CONV.

+3.3V VADR +8V

Y8
+3.3V VADR +8V

Photo Coupler BLOCK

Y9

Scan IC IC3101

D14

D15

D16

D

VKNOFS2 VKNOFS4 VKNOFS3

OR

50F SCAN D ASSY (LOW-SIDE_LOW) 50F SCAN C ASSY (LOW-SIDE_HIGH)

V+1_2V_D V+3_3V_D

D13

LVDS

E

V+1_1V_D V+1_8V_D V+3_3V_D Flash Memory IC3302

UART

AD1 CN1802
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

AD2 CN1801
V+8V

AD1 CN1602
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

AD2 CN1601
ODI_R, G, B LVDS Reciever IC3201
RELAY2 MSEL INP_MUTE UART
VADR1

IC1801 LVDS Receiver

V+3.3V

V+60V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver

V+3.3V

V+60V

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS3 VADR3

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS2 VADR2

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS1 VADR1

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS4 VADR4

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS3 VADR3

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS2 VADR2

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS1

V+3VACTV
CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

D11

F
DRIVER IC IC1871 DRIVER IC IC1861 DRIVER IC IC1851 DRIVER IC IC1681 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1651

50F ADDRESS S ASSY

50F ADDRESS L ASSY

ABC

D

24
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

ODI_SYNC

V+8V

5

6

7

8

50F ADDRESS L ASSY
DRIVER IC IC1651 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1681

50F ADDRESS S ASSY
DRIVER IC IC1851 DRIVER IC IC1861 DRIVER IC IC1871

A

PRIMARY
T701 Switching Q701

POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

Q702 Switching
VADR1

VDDLS1

VADR2

VDDLS2

VADR3

VDDLS3

VADR4

VDDLS4

VADR1

VDDLS1

VADR2

VDDLS2

VADR3

VDDLS3

+390 V Switching T901 Q901

PFC Q101 Q102 Q103

D10 1

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

Q902 Switching
V+60V V+8V V+3.3V

V+60V

V+8V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

V+3.3V

IC1801 LVDS Receiver
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

D109 +35V T501 +16.5V +12V Switching Q501

P11

AD2 CN1601

AD1 CN1602

AD2 CN1801

AD1 CN1802

Q502 Switching

B

FHD POWER SW ASSY
D106 D108 NEUTRAL LIVE

T101 IC101 Switching

AC INLET SW2

RY102

F101

: Wire harness : FFC

P3

D23 +5_1V
RELAY RELAY

SE1

OR

PANEL SENSOR ASSY

DRF_SW_B

50F X DRIVE ASSY
+60V +12V +5.1V

EXT_PD DRF_

C
X3
VSUS +60V +8V +3.3V

X4
+60V +8V +3.3V

DRF_B RELAY

PSW1

AND

AND

X7
+12V

SUS BLOCK
REGULATOR REGULATOR
+8V +3.3V +5V +16.5 VSUS

+5_1V

+5.1V
XSUSTN_PD, XDD_CNV_PD, XDRIVE_PD

D22

XPRST
VSUS

PS_PWDN PD PSW2
XKOFS1_ADJ,XKNOFS2_ADJ

VSUS +16.5V +6.5V

PSW2

REGULATOR
+16.5V

AND

O R

SUS_MUTE

X2

SUS BLOCK Gate Signal
+16.5V +16.5

PSUS

+5V

V+3VACTV
PD_MUTE

V+3VACTV RESET V+3V_D

Drive Signal X1

SUS PreDrive
PU

SOFT-D PSUS
+16.5

Drive Signal
AND

MODULE UCOM M30620FCPGP IC3601

RESET RST2 RST_SQ

LOGIC BLOCK Drive Signal

RESONANCE BLOCK

D

PSIZE

OFFSET BLOCK
VPOFS

D20

VSUS

PSUS

VPOFS
D19

VPU

+16.5V

15V DC/DC CONV.

OFFSET Reg.

VXKOFS1 VXKOFS2

SUS BLOCK
VSUS

LVDS TRANSMITTER

D18

PEG384B
IC3401

+60V +8V +3.3V

+60V +8V +3.3V

SUS BLOCK X5

X6
D17 LVDS

E
SUB-FILD CONV. & XY DRV SEQUENCE PATTERN GEN.
XSUS RESETX

PEG383B-K
IC3301

AD1 CN1602
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

AD2 CN1601

AD1 CN1602
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

AD2 CN1601

EVI_R, G, B

EVI_SYNC

THEATER

VD

V+8V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver

V+3.3V

V+60V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver

V+3.3V

V+8V

V+60V

LVDS Reciever IC3202

RESONANCE BLOCK
LVDS
VDDLS4 VADR4

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS3 VADR3

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS2 VADR2

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS1 VADR1

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS4 VADR4

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS3 VADR3

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS2 VADR2

RESONANCE BLOCK
VDDLS1 VADR1

CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

F
DRIVER IC IC1681 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1651 DRIVER IC IC1681 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1651

50F ADDRESS L ASSY

50F ADDRESS L ASSY

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

25

1

2

3

4

4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
Antenna B Input
U6001 AXF1171 (Frontend)
SIF_OUT

IC6002 74HC4066

SIF_SW SDA_AV5 SCL_AV5

A

TANSHI ASSY

Antenna A Input

U6101 AXF1178 (Frontend)

IC6001 LA72702NVA

SDA_AV5 SCL_AV5

FE_I2C_SEL

MAIN ASSY

IC6102 7W66FU

AIR2_V AIR1_V

AIR_R AIR_L

SDA_AV5 SCL_AV5

I2C_TUNER_SCL I2C_TUNER_SDA

B

AUDIO_OUT_L/R

AUDIO Output

SW_L/R

SUB WOOFER
V

L/R

Input 1 Input 2

Y/C V

IC4601 R2S11006FT (AVSW)

L/R

Y/Pb/Pr

Modulator IR_REPEATER DA_GY

L/R

REM

PC Input Input 4 HDMI Input 5 HDMI

V L/R VBI_Y

C
L/R GY_VDEC Input2_Y/Pb/Pr

IC9101 MAP5601M (MAP)

V L/R

Input 3

Input3_Y/Pb/Pr

IC4701 R2S11001FT (RGBSW)

DA_RCR DA_BCB DA_GY

SIDE IO ASSY
CLP_RGB SDA_AV5 SCL_AV5 PC_RGB

PC Input

PC_H/V

D

SDA_AV SCL_AV

I2S_BCLK_DTV I2S_LRCLK_DTV I2S_SDATA_DTV SPDIF_DTV

I2S_BCLK_HDMI I2S_LRCLK_HDMI I2S_SDATA_HDMI SPDIF_HDMI

SR_OUT

TXD_SR+ RXD_SR+ REM

E
TXD/RXD

RS232C

232C_DET

IC8301 AGC1037(IF UCOM)

IC9201 TAS5122DCA-TBB (D-AMP)

REM

REM DS_IF_P DS_IF_N

FHD IR ASSY

IC7001 TC90173FG

KEY

KEY_AD1/AD2

SIDE KEY ASSY
F
POD Card

IC6301 BCM3517

IC6401 BCM7038

POD ASSY

USB

26
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

: Analog Audio signal : Analog Video signal : Component signal : Digital Video signal : Digital Audio signal : Synchronized signal : Data signal : Control signal : RF signal

A

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

M_SW_DET AC_DET_DRV

MAIN_Y/C

SUB_Y/C

IC4801 CM0048BF (VDEC)

DIN4 DIN3

RA_0 GA_0 BA_0 VD_0 HD_0 IC4101 BU8254KVT (LVDS)

B

SDA_MB SCL_MB

VD3,4 HD3,4 RB_0 GB_0 BB_0 MD_VDEC MA_VDEC MCTRL

IC4102 BU8254KVT (LVDS)

DIGITAL ASSY

REQ_VDEC RST_ASIC

IC4802 HY57V161610FTP (SDRAM)

IC8001 PD6568A-K (ARIA)

MA_ARIA_A MD_ARIA_A

IC8201 EDD1232ABBH (128Mbit DDR)

MA_ARIA_B MD_ARIA_B DIN5_RCR DIN5_BCB DIN5_GY HD5 MA_ARIA_C MD_ARIA_C

IC8202 EDD1232ABBH (128Mbit DDR)

C

IC8203 EDD1232ABBH (128Mbit DDR)

SDA_AV SCL_AV RCR_AD BCB_AD GY_AD

IC5001 AD9985KSTZ (ADC)

HD_PLL HOLD_PLL CLP_AD EXD_ARIA EXA_ARIA

INT_HD1/VD1 EXT_HD1/VD1

IC8204 AGC1049AGC1049 (16Mbit Flash)

RXD_IC3 TXD_IC3

RST_ASIC

VD6 HD6

DIN6_BCB DIN6_RCR DIN6_GY

DIN7_BCB/RCR/GY DIN7_ALPHA

DIN1_DVO

VD1 HD1

VD7 HD7 VD7_0 HD7_0

D

TXD_MD RXD_MD REQ_MD

LED_ON1/ON2/OFF TXD_IF/RXD_IF

IC8401 UPD61123F1 (EMMA2SV)

IC5201 SII9025CTU (HDMI RX)
DSCL_1 DSDA_1

RST_ASIC HDMI_INT

SCL_MB SDA_MB

E

RST3

TXD/RXD_DT

FAN_ON1/CONT1 A0 to 19 DQ0 to 15

FAN_ON2/CONT2

IC8402 AGC1039(FLASH)
TRAP SW

IC4310 PQ200WNA1ZPH (FAN CONTROL)

IC4303 PQ200WNA1ZPH (FAN CONTROL)

IC5101 CXB1442 (HDMI SW)

Input 4 HDMI

Input 5 HDMI

Input 6 HDMI

Input 7 HDMI

F
LED TRAP SW FAN

50 FHD LED ASSY

FHD FAN CONNECT ASSY

FAN

FAN

FAN

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

27

F

E

B

A

D

C

28
SECONDARY PRIMARY
Switching

P1 T701 Q701 Q702
Switching

+16.5V +6.5V

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

1

1

VSUS

P2

+16.5V +6.5V

P7 +390V
Switching

+12V

+5.1V

PFC Q101 Q102 Q103

D101

P6 T901 Q901 Q902
Switching

+60V

+12V

2

2

+5.1V

P5

+16.5V

PDP-5010FD
Switching

P4

+5.1V

D109

P11

DRF_SW_B M_SW_DET EXT_PD VSUS_ADJ PS_PD RELAY DRF_B AC_DET PD_TRIG_B

T501 Q502
Switching

Q501
3

3

P8

+35V +16.5V +12V

+16.5V

+12V

+6.5V

+5.1V

T401 T402 T101 Q203 IC101
Switching

P9

STB5.1V STB3.3V +35V

IC202

D106 D108
NEUTRAL
4

M_SW_DET AC_DET US_SW

4

P12

STB5.1V

LIVE

+12V STB3.3V

+B for Relay Drive

RY102 P10

F101

AC_DET

P3

5

6

7

8

4.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY
A

50F X DRIVE ASSY
+60V +12V +5.1V +60V +8V +3.3V +60V +8V +3.3V VSUS

B

X7
+12V +5.1V

X4
REGULATOR REGULATOR
+8V +3.3V

X3
+16.5 VSUS

SUS BLOCK

XPRST
VSUS +16.5V +6.5V +5V VSUS

REGULATOR

X2
+5V

+16.5V

SUS BLOCK Gate Signal
+16.5V +16.5

PSUS
C

Drive Signal X1

SUS PreDrive
PU

SOFT-D PSUS
+16.5

Drive Signal LOGIC BLOCK Drive Signal

RESONANCE BLOCK

OFFSET BLOCK
VPOFS

D

VSUS

PSUS

VPOFS

VPU

+16.5V

15V DC/DC CONV. X5

OFFSET Reg.

VXKOFS1 VXKOFS2

SUS BLOCK
VSUS

X6

SUS BLOCK
+60V +8V +3.3V +60V +8V +3.3V

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

29

1

2

3

4

4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS

A

50F SCAN B ASSY (HIGH-SIDE_LOW) 50F SCAN A ASSY (HIGH-SIDE_HIGH)
VH IC5V Scan Signal Scan IC IC2804 VH IC5V Scan IC IC2803 PSUS

50F Y DRIVE ASSY
Y6
+16.5V VSUS +8V +3.3V VADR

B

VH

IC5V

Scan IC IC2802 VH IC5V

RST-D BLOCK
VC_P VYPRST
SA1

SUS BLOCK
+16.5V

Y7
VC_S VKNOFS4 +8V +3.3V VADR

Scan IC IC2801

+3.3V +8V VADR

VH

IC5V

SB2

PRST BLOCK
VC_U +16.5V

KNOFS4 SOFT-G BLOCK
VSNOFS VKNOFS2 +16.5V VC_S

REG
+5.1V

REG
12V

Scan IC IC2904 VH IC5V

Y5
+5V

Scan IC IC2903 VH IC5V

PSUS

RESONANCE BLOCK
VC_S VC_S

MSK-S

VH

IC5V

SUSOUT

Scan Signal VH IC5V SB1

Gate Signal

C

Scan IC IC2902

SNOFS KNOFS2 BLOCK

Drive Signal

REG

+16.5V VSUS

Y2
VH IC5V

+6.5V

Scan IC IC2901

Y4
+16.5V +5V

H-MSK

VH

IC5V

Scan Signal PSUS

L-MSK

VSUS

SC1

Scan Signal VH IC5V

Scan IC IC3004 VH IC5V

VH IC5V

SUS BLOCK

SUS PreDrive

Drive Signal

Drive Signal Y3
VC_U +16.5V VSUS VYPRST VSNOFS VKNOFS1 VH

Scan IC IC3003 VH IC5V

LOGIC BLOCK

Scan IC IC3002

PSUS

D

VH

IC5V

RESONANCE BLOCK

SUS BLOCK

Y1

VSUS

Scan IC IC3001

MAIN DC/DC CONV.

VKNOFS1
SC2 VH IC5V

+16.5V

VKNOFS3

VKNOFS2 VKNOFS4 VKNOFS3 +16.5V VC_S VC_U +16.5V IC5V VC_P VSUS

SD1

Scan IC IC3104 VH IC5V Scan IC IC3103 VH IC5V Scan IC IC3102 VH IC5V

KNOFS1 KNOFS3 BLOCK
IC5V

SUS BLOCK

15V DC/DC CONV. Scan Signal

IC5V/VF DC/DC CONV.

Y8

+3.3V VADR +8V

Photo Coupler BLOCK

Y9

+3.3V VADR +8V

E

Scan IC IC3101

50F SCAN D ASSY (LOW-SIDE_LOW) 50F SCAN C ASSY (LOW-SIDE_HIGH)

F

30
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS
A

50F Y DRIVE ASSY
Logic

to ADDRESS ASSY
3.3V 9V 3.3V Reg.IC 9V Reg.IC 5V Reg.IC 5.1V

50F X DRIVE ASSY
Logic 5.0V

to ADDRESS ASSY
3.3V 9.0V 3.3V Reg.IC 9V Reg.IC 5V Reg.IC 5.1V 12V 6.5V 16.5V
VSUS

12V 6.5V 16.5V
VSUS
SUS-B FET Pre drive

SUS-B FET

Pre drive

5.0V
Pre drive

5.0V
Pre drive

B

SUS-G FET

SUS-G FET

SUS-U IGBT

Pre drive

VF1 VF2

15V DC/DC Conv.

from POWER SUPPLY

SUS-U IGBT

Pre drive

VF

DC/DC Conv. VPOFS

from POWER SUPPLY

SUS-D IGBT

Pre drive

VF3 IC5V

IC5V DC/DC Conv.

SUS-D IGBT

Pre drive

HMSK FET LMSK FET
YPRST FET

Pre drive

XPRST FET

Pre drive

VH
Pre drive

DC/DC Conv.

XSOFT-G FET

Pre drive

C

Pre drive

VYPRST Reg.

XKOFS1 FET

Pre drive

VXKOFS1 VXKOFS1
Reg.

SNOFS FET

Pre drive

VSNOFS Reg.

XKOFS2 FET

Pre drive

VXKOFS2 VXKOFS2
Reg.

YKOFS 1 FET YKOFS 2 FET YKOFS 3 FET YKOFS 4 FET

Pre drive

VYKOFS 12 Reg.

Pre drive

Pre drive

VYKOFS 3 Reg. VYKOFS 4 Reg.

Note: VYPRST, VSNOFS, VYKOFS12, VYKOFS3, VYKOFS4 VXKOFS1 and VXKOFS2 voltages are electrical volume controls.

D

Pre drive

RST-D FET

Pre drive

SOFT-G

FET

Pre drive

Scan Logic IC5V VH

E
Scan IC

50F SCAN A, B, C, D ASSYS

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

31

1

2

3

4

4.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS
50F ADDRESS L ASSY
A
DRIVER IC IC1651 DRIVER IC IC1661 DRIVER IC IC1671 DRIVER IC IC1681

CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

B
VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3 VADR4 VDDLS4

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

V+60V
C

V+8V

V+3.3V

IC1601 LVDS Receiver
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

AD2 CN1601

AD1 CN1602

50F ADDRESS S ASSY
DRIVER IC IC1851 DRIVER IC IC1861 DRIVER IC IC1871

D

CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLK R/G/B

VADR1

VDDLS1

VADR2

VDDLS2

VADR3

VDDLS3

E

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

RESONANCE BLOCK

V+60V

V+8V

V+3.3V

IC1801 LVDS Receiver
AN/P BN/P CN/P DN/P CLKN/P

F

AD2 CN1801
32
1 2

AD1 CN1802
PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY
50F DIGITAL ASSY
V+3V_EE
SCL,SDA TEMP1

D24 +5_1V
RELAY

D23

A

V+2_5V_D

V+1_2V_D

RELAY Vsus_ADJ PD_TRG_B, AC_DET, M_SW_DET

OR

1.2V REG. V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D

RELAY2

V+3_3V_D
RELAY

DRF_B

1.8V REG.

V+2_5V_D

DC-DC CONVERTER BD8602FV IC3801 +5_1V V+1_1V_D
VH_UV_PD, YDRIVE_PD, YRESNC_PD, YDD_CHV_PD, IC5V_UV_PD

PSW1

AND

AND

EXT_PD DRF_

DRF_SW_B

PS_PWDN SCL, SDA SCL, SDA DAC PD PSW2
XKOFS1_ADJ,XKNOFS2_ADJ

XSUSTN_PD, XDD_CNV_PD, XDRIVE_PD

B
D22

VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ, XKNOFS1_2_ADJ, XKNOFS3_ADJ,XKNOFS4_ADJ,

D21

PSW2

DAC

SCAN,YSUS

STOP_SQ ADR PD MSK

AND

Pulse Width MASK
ADR_PD1

SQ_NON

O R

Pulse Width
ADRS PD PD_MUTE

SUS_MUTE V+3VACTV V+3VACTV RESET V+3V_D

OR D16 MODULE UCOM M30620FCPGP IC3601

RESET RST2 RST_SQ AND

C

PSIZE

D15

D14

D19

V+1_2V_D V+3_3V_D

D20

LVDS TRANSMITTER
D13

D

PEG384B
IC3401
LVDS LVDS V+1_1V_D V+1_8V_D V+3_3V_D Flash Memory IC3302 D18 XSUS RESETX D17

UART

SUB-FILD CONV. & XY DRV SEQUENCE PATTERN GEN.

PEG383B-K
IC3301
VD

E

ODI_R, G, B

EVI_R, G, B

ODI_SYNC

LVDS Reciever IC3201

LVDS Reciever IC3202

RELAY2

MSEL

INP_MUTE UART

V+3VACTV

LVDS

EVI_SYNC

THEATER

F

D11

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

33

1

2

3

4

4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM)

A

B

To POD ASSY [CN4005/CN4006]

G-Link

To TANSHI ASSY [CN4001] IF SW [IC6103]

RF AGC

AIR1_V

Tuner [U6101]

IF

To AV_SW

I2C_TUNER_SDA

CIMaX sp2 [IC7302]

Logic Circuit

OOB_Data IF AGC EBI BUS

SAW filter FLASH 32M [IC6902 ] EEPROM 64Kbit

QPSK IF

I2C_TUNER_SCL

VBI SLICER [IC7001 ]

QPSK IF Down Conv. [IC6201]

SCL_AV5

I2C SW [IC6102]

SDA_AV5

From EMMA2

I2C1

C
I2S out HSX_0 I2C0 TS TS0 SPDIF out

Demodulate IC BCM3517 KQLGB0-K [IC6301]

SDRAM [IC6602] 256Mbit SDRAM [IC6603] 256 Mbit SDRAM [IC6604] 256Mbit

.

1Chip System IC BCM7038KPB1G-B2-K [IC6401]

DVO [12bit]

To ARIA
YUV(656) [8bit]

MEMORY BUS

From VDEC

.

D

SDRAM [IC6605] 256 Mbit

. UARTA VBI_Y

From AV_SW

E

F

34
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

35

1

2

3

4

4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY

A

SW REG CONTROLED BY RELAY
V+35V Discrete 30V-REG (V+30V_ANT_A) V+12V IC4310 Variable REG (FAN_VCC1) PQ200WNA1ZPH V+6_5V IC4305 5V-REG (V+5V_ANT_A) NJM2846DL3-05

for Tuner V+30V_ANT_A

for Main BoardFAN FAN_VCC1

for Ant_A, QPSK, Ant_B, MPX V+5V_ANT_A V+5V_ANT_A_SAW

B

Discrete 30V-REG (V+30V_ANT_B)

for Tuner V+30V_ANT_B

IC4303 Variable REG (FAN_VCC2) PQ200WNA1ZPH

for FHD Panel FAN FAN_VCC2

V+5V_ANT_A_QPSK V+5V_ANT_B V+5V_ANT_B_MPX

for SW, Audio, Ant_A, IC4301 8V-LEG (Variable REG) Ant_B, DSP (V+8V_AIR/AU/A/A2 V+8V_A /DSP) PQ200WNA1ZPH V+8V_A_AV V+8V_A_DSP

IC4307 5V-REG (V+5V_A) NJM2846DL3-05

for AV_SW, RGB_SW, HDMIROM, 7038EEPROM, 7038IIC A/D V+5V_A_AV V+5V_A_7038 V+5V_A2_RGB V+5V_A2_HDMI_ROM

C
IC4309 DD com. (V+5V_USB/DLNA) R1224N102H/ RTQ040P02 V+3_3V_STB for IF U COM V+5_1V_STB V+3_3V_STB IC6402 Switch IC (V+5V_USB) R5523H001B

for USB, DLNA

V+5V_HNM

STBY SW REG
V+5_1V_STB

V+5V_USB

D

Filter (V+3_3V_UCOM)

IC4308 Variable REG (POD_VPP) PQ200WNA1ZPH

for POD VPP POD_VPP (5.0V/3.3V)

Q4421 FET Switch (V+3_3V_UCOM) RTQ040P02

for EMMA

V+3_3V_UCOM V+3_3V_UCOM_ROM

IC4306 DD com. (POD_VCC) R1224N102H/ RTQ040P02

for POD_VCC POD_VCC (3.3V)

E

LC Filter (V+5V_D)

V+5V_D

2ch DD com. LTC 3407
IC4501 DD com. (V+2_5V_UCOM) LTC3407-2 IC4401 3.3V-REG (V+3_3V_A) NJM2846DL3-33

for EMMA

V+2_5V_UCOM V+2_5V_UCOM_DDR

V+3_3V_A_ADC

IC4501 DD com. (V+1_5V_UCOM) LTC3407-1

for EMMA

Q4416 FET Switch (V+3_3V_A_VDEC) RTQ040P02

V+3_3V_A_VDEC

V+1_5V_UCOM IC4404 DD com. (V+1_2V_D) LTC3416 for 7038, 3517 V+1_2V_D_7038 V+1_2V_D_3517

F

36
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

V+5_1V

IC4403 3ch DD com. (V+3_3V_D) BD8602FV-1/ SP8M4

for 7038, 3517, POD, DT_D, DSP, ARIA, LVDS, VDEC_D, ADC, HDMI, HDMI_SW, VBI Q4515 FET Switch (V+3_3V_D2) V+3_3V_A2_7038 RTQ040P02 V+3_3V_A2_DSP V+3_3V_D_DSP V+3_3V_D_ADC V+3_3V_UCOM_VBI

B
V+3_3V_D_7038 V+3_3V_D_7038_ROM

3ch DD com. BD8602F V

V+3_3V_D_3517 V+3_3V_D_POD

Q4415 FET Switch (V+3_3V_D2) RTQ040P02

for VDEC_D, HDMI, HDMI_SW V+3_3V_D2_VDEC V+3_3V_D2_VDEC_RAM Q4418 FET Switch (V+3_3V_D3) RTQ045N03

C

V+3_3V_D3_HDMI V+3_3V_D3_HDMISW

Q4404 FET Switch (V+3_3V_D4) RTQ040P02

V+3_3V_D4_ARIA V+3_3V_D4_ARIA_ROM

IC4405 1.8V-REG (V+1_8V_A) NJM2846DL3-18

V+1_8V_A_HDMI

IC4403 3ch DD com. (V+2_5V_D) BD8602FV-3/ SP8M4

V+3_3V_D4_LVDS for 7038, 3517, ARIA, VBI V+2_5V_D_7038 V+2_5V_D_7038_DDR V+2_5V_D_3517 Q4411 FET Switch (V+2_5V_D2) RSS100N03

Q4422 FET Switch (V+1_8V_A_VDEC) MCH3406

V+1_8V_A_VDEC

D

V+2_5V_D2_ARIA V+2_5V_D2_ARIA_DDR

Q4514 FET Switch (V+3_3V_D2) RTQ040P02

V+2_5V_UCOM_VBI

E

IC4403 3ch DD com. (V+1_2V_D2) BD8602FV-3/ RSS100N03 RSS090P03

for ARIA

IC4106 1.5V-REG V+1_2V_D2_ARIA (V+1_5V_VDEC) NJM2886DL3-15

V+1_5V_UCOM_VBI

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

37

1

2

3

4

4.13 TANSHI ASSY

A

TANSHI ASSY
+16.5V +8V +3.3V +16.5V +12V +3.3V +1.8V

IO6

IO5
REGULATOR IC9181 NJM78M12DL1A REGULATOR IC9191 NJM2846DL3

B
+16.5V PWM

+3.3V

+1.8V

DIGITAL AMP IC IC9201 TAS5122DCA

MAP IC IC9101 MAP5601M

OPT_OUT

OPTICAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUT AUDIO OUT INPUT1 INPUT(VIDEO) INPUT2 AIR INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 PC AUDIO AIR

IO4

OUTPUT(AUDIO) INPUT(AUDIO)

for MAIN ASSY

LPF

C
DC DETECT BLOCK SCL_AV SDA_AV RST_MSP SPDIF_DTV I2S_DTV SPDIF_HDMI

IO3

IO2

INPUT3(YPbPr)

for SIDE IO ASSY
IO1
INPUT3(AUDIO,CVBS) HP

R_OUT+

R_OUT-

L_OUT+

L_OUT-

for SIDE IO ASSY
OTW A_NG_B

for MAIN ASSY
IO8
D

IO9

R OUT

L OUT

SP TERMINAL

E

F

38
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

4.14 50FHD LED and FHD IR ASSYS

5

DIGITAL ASSY
D11 P8 P9

POWER SUPPLY UNIT USB FAN

FAN
M1 M4 M3 M2 M21 M11 FA3 M5 FA1

FAN

FAN

LED_ON

LED_OFF

LED_TIMER

6

6

FA4

FA5

50FHD LED ASSY MAIN ASSY

PDP-5010FD
M15 M6 M8 M9 M33 M34 IO4 IO3 IO5 C1 C2

FHD FAN CONNECT ASSY

FHD IR ASSY
7

7

FHD RLS ASSY

IO_AUDIO ASSY

POD ASSY

8

8 E A D C B

39

F

1

2

3

4

4.15 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of FHD RLS and SIDE KEY ASSYS

A

FHD RLS ASSY
B

MAIN ASSY

CN9781

V+3_3V_UCOM OP AMP IC9781 MM3012XN RLS IC9782 AMS114YD01

C

D

SIDE KEY ASSY

MAIN ASSY

CN9501

V+3_3V_STB

KEY S9501 to S9507

E

F

40
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5. DIAGNOSIS
5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
5.1.1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION
LED Pattern
A

POWER

ON

STANDBY

SLEEP

State
AC OFF or Main power switch OFF

LED
Blue Red Orange Blue

LED Pattern / Remarks
Lightins out Lightins out Lightins out Lightins out Always lighting Lightins out Always lighting Lightins out Lightins out
Once 500 mS Twice n times Once
B

Standby power management

Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue
500 mS Once Twice n times

Power ON

Power-down

2.5 S Lightins out 2.5 S
Once
C

Shutdown

Red Orange Blue

Lightins out
200 mS

No digital adjustment data copied for backup

Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue Red Orange Blue Red Orange
500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 100 mS 100 mS

Always lighting Lightins out
100 mS 100 mS

In the process of rewriting the program of the microcomputer During factory operation During DTV Module software downloading

Lightins out
D

Downloading of DTV Module software is finished normally. Downloading of DTV Module software is abnormally finished.

500 mS

500 mS

500 mS

E

500 mS

500 mS

500 mS

Always lighting Always lighting Lightins out

Trap switch

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

41

1

2

3

4

5.1.2 POWER ON SEQUENCE

A

REM infrared receiver

Side Keys

MOD Microcomputer IC3151

4

Power MOD RELAY Control

B

Inv. Amp Q9731
REM KEY_1 KEY_2 TXD_MD RXD_MD REQ_MD

C

1
SR_IN

3

Inv. Amp Q4105

1

IF Microcomputer IC8301
TXD_IF RXD_IF CE_IF REQ_IF BUSY_IF

2

MAIN Microcomputer IC8401

Inv. Amp Q8302
SR_OUT

D

SR OUT Jack JA9404

1 : The remote control (or KEY) signal is input to the IF microcomputer. 2 : The IF microcomputer sends the operation data of the remote control unit (or KEY) to the main microcomputer. 3 : The main microcomputer issues a startup command (PON) to the MOD microcomputer. 4 : The relay is controlled with logical OR interpretation of control signals by the main microcomputer and module (MOD) microcomputer.
E

F

42
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.1.3 DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE

A

Power supply status - AC off
ON OFF

Microcomputer output port state
IF: ACTIVE Main: RELAY2 Main: PSW1 Module: RELAY Module: DRF_B

Power supply OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
IR/Key/ 232C IF ucom Short LED M_SW_DET ACTIVE M_SW_DET_B RST3 RST4 PDET DCDC/REG AND RST2 MOD_ RST VDEC EMG_USB HDMI ASIC DLNA/USB GR LVDS-Tx (Elite) USB OR RELAY Module_ ucom AND DRF_B DCDC/REG RST2 LVDS-Rx DAC SQ ASIC Vcc A.D.TUNER A.TUNER D.TUNER A.TUNER A.D.TUNER VBI COFDEM BCM CIF POD iLink AAC-DEC USB(Reg.) AV-SW FAN RGB-SW AD D-AMP DCDC/REG STB AC_DET R US_SW AC_ DET

V+3.3V_STB V+5.1V_STB

AC

Microcomputer input port state
Main: RST4 Main: RST2 Module: RST2

AND

I/O
MAP MSP M_SW _DET

Main Switch
B

OFF OFF OFF

EEPROM

Main_ ucom

PSW1

SW

Main

Jumper P11
Relay
V+35V V+16.5V V+12V V+6.5V V+5.1V VSUS VADR

EEPROM

Digital
BAK_EEP

Vsus Vadr

C

X/Y Drive Scan
DRIVE DCDC/REG

Address
ASIC ADDRESS

Sensor

DRIVE/SCAN

The state of AC cord is pulled out.

Power supply status - Main switch off
ON OFF

D

Microcomputer output port state
IF: ACTIVE Main: PSW1 Module: RELAY Module: DRF_B

Power supply ON OFF OFF OFF
IR/Key/ 232C IF ucom Short LED M_SW_DET ACTIVE M_SW_DET_B RST3 PDET DCDC/REG AND RST2 MOD_ RST VDEC HDMI ASIC DLNA/USB GR LVDS-Tx (Elite) USB EMG_USB OR RELAY Module_ ucom AND DRF_B DCDC/REG RST2 LVDS-Rx DAC SQ ASIC Vcc A.D.TUNER A.TUNER D.TUNER A.TUNER A.D.TUNER VBI COFDEM BCM CIF POD iLink AAC-DEC USB(Reg.) AV-SW FAN RGB-SW AD D-AMP DCDC/REG STB AC_DET R US_SW AC_ DET

V+3.3V_STB V+5.1V_STB

AC

Microcomputer input port state
Main: RST4 Main: RST2 Module: RST2

ON OFF OFF

RST4 EEPROM Main_ ucom PSW1

AND

I/O
MAP MSP M_SW _DET

Main Switch

E

SW

Main

Jumper P11
Relay
V+35V V+16.5V V+12V V+6.5V V+5.1V VSUS VADR

EEPROM

Digital
BAK_EEP

Vsus Vadr

X/Y Drive Scan
DRIVE DCDC/REG

Address
ASIC ADDRESS

Sensor

DRIVE/SCAN

F

The user operation with the remote control unit is invalid. (All LED: OFF) Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate. RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the IC.

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

43

1

2

3

4

A

Power supply status - Standby
ON OFF

Microcomputer output port state
IF: ACTIVE Main: PSW1 Module: RELAY Module: DRF_B

Power supply ON OFF OFF OFF
IR/Key/ 232C IF ucom Short LED M_SW_DET ACTIVE M_SW_DET_B RST3 PDET DCDC/REG AND RST2 MOD_ RST VDEC HDMI ASIC DLNA/USB GR LVDS-Tx (Elite) USB EMG_USB OR RELAY Module_ ucom AND DRF_B DCDC/REG RST2 LVDS-Rx DAC SQ ASIC Vcc A.D.TUNER A.TUNER D.TUNER A.TUNER A.D.TUNER VBI COFDEM BCM CIF POD iLink AAC-DEC USB(Reg.) AV-SW FAN RGB-SW AD D-AMP DCDC/REG STB AC_DET R US_SW AC_ DET

V+3.3V_STB V+5.1V_STB

AC

Microcomputer input port state
B
Main: RST4 Main: RST2 Module: RST2

ON OFF OFF

RST4 EEPROM Main_ ucom PSW1

AND

I/O
MAP MSP M_SW _DET

Main Switch

SW

Main
"POF"

Jumper P11
Relay
V+35V V+16.5V V+12V V+6.5V V+5.1V VSUS VADR

EEPROM

C

Digital
BAK_EEP

Vsus Vadr

X/Y Drive Scan
DRIVE DCDC/REG

Address
ASIC ADDRESS

Sensor

DRIVE/SCAN

Remote control unit waiting state. (Red LED: ON) Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate. RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the IC.

Power supply status - ON
D
ON OFF

Microcomputer output port state
IF: ACTIVE Main: PSW1 Module: RELAY Module: DRF_B

Power supply ON ON ON ON
IR/Key/ 232C IF ucom Short LED M_SW_DET ACTIVE M_SW_DET_B RST3 RST4 EEPROM Main_ ucom MOD_ RST SW PSW1 AND RST2 VDEC EMG_USB HDMI ASIC DLNA/USB GR LVDS-Tx (Elite) USB OR RELAY Module_ ucom AND DRF_B DCDC/REG RST2 LVDS-Rx DAC SQ ASIC Vcc PDET DCDC/REG A.TUNER A.D.TUNER A.TUNER D.TUNER A.D.TUNER VBI COFDEM BCM CIF POD iLink AAC-DEC USB(Reg.) AV-SW FAN RGB-SW AD D-AMP DCDC/REG STB AC_DET R US_SW AC_ DET

V+3.3V_STB V+5.1V_STB

AC

Microcomputer input port state
Main: RST4 Main: RST2 Module: RST2

AND

I/O
MAP MSP M_SW _DET

Main Switch

ON ON ON

E

Main
"PON"

Jumper P11
Relay
V+35V V+16.5V V+12V V+6.5V V+5.1V VSUS VADR

EEPROM

Digital
BAK_EEP

Vsus Vadr

X/Y Drive Scan
DRIVE DCDC/REG

Address
ASIC ADDRESS

F

Sensor

DRIVE/SCAN

A state when it displays a picture on the PDP. (Blue LED: ON) All devices are electrified.

44
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS
5.2.1 WHOLE UNIT
A

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Whole Unit
START Note: Check that the Main power SW is ON side.

Problems concerning STB status

Is the STB LED lit? Yes

No Is STB 3.3 V power supplied? (Check the power at the IF microcomputer on the MAIN Assy.) Yes

No

Check if the cable that connects the POWER SUPPLY and MAIN Assys is firmly connected.

NG Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS1
B

The green LED on the DIGITAL Assy indicates ON/STB of the panel and causes for a power-down or shutdown. If neither the green nor red LED lights, it is likely that the power to the STB system is not supplied. (failure, PASV-STB status)

Are the voltages at AC_DET and No Replace the POWER SUPPLY MSW_DET on the POWER Unit. SUPPLY Unit high? Yes If AC_DET or MSW_DET is Low, LED goes off. Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA1 Problems concerning the power Is the voltage at the RELAY port of the connectors between the DIGITAL Assy and POWER SUPPLY Unit H (3.3 V)? Yes Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS2 A shutdown occurs. No A power-down occurs. No Problems concerning lighting of the panel
• Check the DRF SW. • Before turning the drive off with the RS-232C commands or using the remote control unit, turn the unit off.

C

Can the unit be turned on (Relay ON)? Yes

No

Is the power shutdown? Yes

No

No Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA2
If a module microcomputer does not set a relay in High, there is a possibility that a main microcomputer does not issue a command (PON).

Yes

See "5.4 DIAGNOSE OF SD (SHUTDOWN)."

Yes

A power-down will not be generated if the drive is off.

See "5.3 DIAGNOSE OF PD (POWER-DOWN)."

D

Does the screen display reset lighting? Yes

No

Is the drive off? No Failure analysis for the drive system => DR1

Yes

Turn the drive on.

Is the panel arbitrary turned on or off repeatedly? Or do luminescent spots appear on the screen? No

Yes Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS3 Failure analysis for the Yes drive system => DR2

In a case where luminescent spots appear or the panel is repeatedly turned on or off

E

In a case where luminescent spots appear

Is there any local abnormality on the screen? No

Yes Is the abnormality associated with one ADDRESS or one TCP? Yes Failure analysis for the drive system => DR3

No

Is the abnormality associated with a single scan line? Yes Failure analysis for the drive system => DR4

No

Replace the panel chassis.

F

A
PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

45

1

2

3

4

A

A
In the subsequent diagnostic steps, it is most likely that the multi base section is in failure. Problems concerning video display

Is the panel mask properly displayed? Yes

No

Is it return to properly indication when a command (PMTS00) is issued?

No Failure analysis for the drive system => DR2 Yes Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA4

A main microcomputer may stop in the state that it hung a panel mute due to something.

B
Check with the animated slanting ramp mask.

Is the on-screen display (OSD) properly displayed? Yes

No Failure analysis for the DIGITAL Assy => DG1

Check on the Factory menu.

Is an external video signal displayed properly? Yes

No Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA3

Problems concerning the audio output
C

Is the audio signal output? Yes

No Failure analysis for the audio system => AU1

Specific failure whose cause is difficult to identify in the initial stage

D

E

F

46
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.2.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The POWER SUPPLY Unit
Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS1 STB 3.3 V power is not output.

A

Is the cable connected firmly to the P4 connector? Yes Is the cable to the P4 connector broken? No Is the cable connected firmly to the P9 connector? Yes Is the cable to the P9 connector broken? No Is the fuse (F101) blown? No Is one of the limiting resistors (R101/R102) blown? No The POWER SUPPLY Unit is normal.

No

Properly connect the cable between the P4 and D23 connectors.

Yes

Check the voltage at the DIGITAL Assy and

Replace the defective cable (J104). POWER SUPPLY Unit.
B

No

Properly connect the cable between the P9 and M2 connectors.

Yes

Replace the defective cable (J106).

Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.
Check the resistance between C102 (lead nearest LF101) and the D105 anode, using a tester.

Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

C

Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS2

The power is not on, even though the RELAY port is active.

Is the relay (RY102) on? Yes Is the PFC voltage normal? Yes The POWER SUPPLY Unit is normal.

No

Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

• Check the relay operation at the terminal (Pin 11 of P4). (Voltage: 3.3 V) • Check the relay sound (click).

D

No

Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

• Check the voltage between the JW135 (PFC OUT) and JW112 (GND of primary side) terminal. • The voltage must be around 390 V. Caution: High voltage!

Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS3

The cells of the panel do not light normally.
The specified voltage values are between 57 and 63 V.

Is the VADR voltage within the specified values? Yes Is there a fluctuation in the VADR voltage? No Is the VSUS voltage within the specified range? Yes Is there a fluctuation in the VSUS voltage? No The POWER SUPPLY Unit is normal.

No

Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

E

Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

The ripple must be within 5 V.

No

Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

The specified voltage values are between 200 and 210 V (VSU: 125/35°C).

Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

The ripple must be within 10 V.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

47

1

2

3

4

5.2.3 DRIVE ASSY

A

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Drive Assy
Failure analysis for the drive system => DR1

Reset lighting is not displayed.

X/Y DRIVE Assys
B

Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel? Yes

No

Are the FFC cables properly connected? Yes

No

Properly connect the FFC cables. NG

Are the panel FPC and SCAN Assys No connectors properly connected to the X/Y DRIVE Assys? Yes
C

Properly connect the panel FPC and SCAN Assys connectors. NG

Is the input signal normal? Yes

No

Replace the FFC cables. NG

Replace the panel chassis.

Replace the X/Y DRIVE Assys.

Replace the DIGITAL Assy.

D

E

F

48
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Failure analysis for the drive system => DR2

Abnormality across the whole screen, such as luminescent spots Because it is difficult to identify which drive is in failure, follow the flowchart below to check each Assy. Y DRIVE Assy / SCAN A, B, C, D Assys

X DRIVE Assy

ADDRESS Assy
B

Y DRIVE Assy No

B

C
Reconnect the connectors. NG

Are all the connectors properly connected? Yes Is the VH set voltage (130 V) correctly set? Yes

No

Set the VH voltage correctly. NG

No Is the VSNOFS set voltage correctly set (set value: designated for each panel)? Yes Is the VYRST set voltage correctly set (set value: designated for each panel)? Yes Is the VKNOFS1, 2 set voltage correctly set? Yes No Is the VKNOFS3 set voltage correctly set (set value: designated for each panel)? Yes No Is the VKNOFS4 set voltage correctly set (set value: designated for each panel)? Yes No No

Set the VSNOFS voltage correctly. NG Set the VYRST voltage correctly. NG

C

Set the VKNOFS1, 2 voltage correctly. NG

Set the VKNOFS3 voltage correctly. NG

D

Set the VKNOFS 4voltage correctly. NG

Another Assy may be in failure.

Yes Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel? (See the oscilloscope photos.) No
E

Is the input signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.) Yes

No

Replace the FFC cables. NG Replace the DIGITAL Assy.

D
Is the waveform of the control signal from the SCAN Assy normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.) Yes Replace the SCAN IC. No Replace the Y DRIVE Assy.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

49

1

2

3

4

A

B

X DRIVE Assy

Are all the connectors properly connected? Yes

No

Reconnect the connectors. NG

Is the VXKOFS1 set voltage correctly set? Yes
B

No

Set the VXKOFS1 voltage correctly. NG

Is the VXKOFS2 set voltage correctly set?

No

Set the VXKOFS2 voltage correctly. NG

D

Yes

Another Assy may be in failure.

Yes Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel? (See the oscilloscope photos.) No

C

Is the input signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.) Yes Replace the X DRIVE Assy.

No

Replace the FFC cables. NG Replace the DIGITAL Assy.

C

ADDRESS Assy

Are all the connectors properly connected?
D

No

Reconnect the connectors. NG

Yes

Is the TCP control signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.) Yes

No

Is the input signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.) Yes No

Replace the panel chassis.

Replace the FFC cables. NG

E

Replace the DIGITAL Assy.

F

50
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Failure analysis for the drive system => DR3

Diagnose the ADDRESS Assy.

The abnormality is associated with one ADDRESS or one TCP?

Is the TCP control signal normal? Yes

No

Are the FFC cables properly connected? Yes

No

Properly connect the FFC cables. NG
B

Replace the panel chassis.
In most cases of damage on one line, the panel chassis must be replaced.

NG

Replace the DIGITAL Assy.

If the FFC cable that connects the DIGITAL and ADDRESS Assys is in failure, the abnormality is associated with one address in most cases.

Failure analysis for the drive system => DR4

Diagnose the SCAN A, B, C and D Assys.

The abnormality is associated with a single scan line.

C

Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel? Yes

No

No Is the Three pieces connector connected properly to the socket? Yes

Reconnect the connector properly. NG

Is the waveform of the SCAN IC control signal from the Y DRIVE Assy normal? Yes Replace the SCAN IC. NG Replace the panel chassis.

No

Replace the Y DRIVE Assy.

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

51

1

2

3

4

5.2.4 DIGITAL ASSY

A

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The DIGITAL Assy
Failure analysis for the DIGITAL Assy => DG1

The on-screen display (OSD) is not properly indicated.

• If the OSD is not properly displayed although the panel mask is properly displayed, a failure exists in the path from the output of IC2801 on the MAIN Assy to IC3301 on the DIGITAL Assy. -> If only the OSD is abnormal, the MAIN Assy is in failure.

Is V sync judgment detected by issuing the QSI command?
B

No

Is the sync signal properly output from the MAIN Assy? Yes

No

Replace the MAIN Assy.
If neither the V frequency nor H existence judgment is inappropriate, it is most likely that the output from the DIGITAL Assy is in free run and that the screen only displays reset lighting. (It is judged that the drive, POWER SUPPLY Unit and the panel are normal.)

Yes

No

Is the 50-pin FFC cable (J211) firmly connected? Yes

No

Firmly connect the 50-pin FFC cable (J211).
When disconnecting the FFC cable, take care not to damage the CN3201 connector on the DIGITAL Assy, which can easily be damaged.

Is the 50-pin FFC cable (J211) broken? No
C

Yes Replace the 50-pin FFC cable (J211).
In a case of D11

Is the FFC connector poorly contacted? Yes
DIGITAL : D11 MAIN : M1

No

Replace the DIGITAL Assy.
In a case of M1

Replace the MAIN Assy.

Replace the MAIN Assy. No
It is most likely that the sync signal is abnormal.

Is the indication position correct? Yes
D

Is the tone correct? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.

No
It is most likely that the video signal data are missing.

E

F

52
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.2.5 MAIN ASSY

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The MAIN Assy
Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA1

A

The STB LED does not light although STB 3.3 V power is supplied.

Does the POWER switch on? Yes Is resetting of the IF microcomputer canceled? Yes Is the voltage at Pin 3 of the M11 connector High? Yes Is the M11 connector securely connected? Yes Is the cable that is connected to the M11 connector broken? No No problem with the MAIN Assy. Check the LED Assy.

No

Turn the POWER switch on.

No

Failure in the RST IC (IC8302) output or its peripheral circuits

B

Replace the MAIN Assy.

No

Failure in the line between the IF microcomputer and M11 connector

Replace the MAIN Assy.

No

Securely connect the M11 connector.

Yes

Replace the cable (J115).
C

Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA2

The RELAY port does not work. The power is not turned on.

Does the POWER switch on? Yes Is the voltage at Pin 3 of the M1 connector 3.3 V? Yes

No

Turn the POWER switch on.

D

No

Relay control is unable unless it supplies a power supply to the module microcompute.

Replace the MAIN Assy.

Are the voltages (3.3 V/2.5 V/1.5 V) No supplied to the main microcomputer? Yes Is voltage at REQ_IF on the MAIN Assy High (3.3 V)? Yes No

Replace the MAIN Assy.

• Failure in the output of REG IC (IC4501). • Is active low?

Can the unit be turned on, using the remote control unit? Yes

No

Replace the cable that connects between the IR and MAIN Assys.

No

Replace the IR Assy. No Replace the MAIN Assy.
E

Can the unit be turned on, using the Power switch on the unit? Yes Can the unit be turned on, using RS-232C commands?

No

No Replace the cable that connects between the SIDE KEY and MAIN Assys.

Replace the SIDE KEY Assy. No

No

Replace the MAIN Assy.
Failure in the RS-232C driver and its peripheral circuits

Replace the MAIN Assy.

Failure in the Main microcomputer.

F

Replace the MAIN Assy.

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

53

1

2

3

4

5.2.6 VIDEO SYSTEM

A

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System
Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA3

The input signal is not displayed.

Is the selected input signal a terrestrial analog TV?
B

Yes

=> TV

No Is the selected input signal a composite signal? No Is the selected input signal a S-video signal? No Is the selected input signal a component signal? No Yes => COMP / PC1 Yes => COMP / S Yes => COMP / S

C

Is the selected input signal an PC signal? No Is the selected input signal a digital TV signal? No Is the selected input signal an HDMI signal? No

Yes

=> PC

Yes

=> DTV

Yes Are the data displayed on the "HDMI SIGNAL INFO" page of the Factory menu correct? Yes

No

After changing the source equipment, check the "HDMI SIGNAL INFO" data again. OK The source equipment previously used is in failure. No problem with the MAIN Assy.

NG

Replace the MAIN Assy.

D

Does the result of SIG mode No detection on the Factory menu coincide with the input signal data? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.

Is the sync signal output from IC5201? Yes

No

Replace the MAIN Assy.

Is the sync signal input to IC8001? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.

No

Replace the MAIN Assy.

E

Is the selected input signal a USB signal? No

Yes

=> USB_E / USB_R

No problem with the MAIN Assy

F

54
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System
No video from Composite or S-VIDEO
=> COMP/S

A

Image for the composite or S-video signal is not displayed. Yes Is the function correspondeing to selected signal input selected? Yes Is the compornent cable is connect to jack? (Input1 to Input3) Yes Has the signal arrived at IC4601? (pins 85, 91, 72) Yes Which signal is not output, main or sub signal? MAIN Is a signal output from IC4601? (pins 42, 45) Yes No Check around IC4601 and check the No communications between IC4601 and microcomuputer. If there was no ploblem replace IC4601. Check the circuit between IC4601 and IC4801 and replace broken parts. No Is a signal output from IC4601? (pin 49) Yes No Check the flexible cable between CN8804 and CN4004. Check the flexible cable between CN8803 and CN4001. NG Replace or reconnect flexible cable. No Disconnect component and confirm again. NG Replace the TANSHI Assy. No Select the corresponding signal with the Input selector.
B

1
SUB

3 4

5

C

Has the signal arrived at IC4801? (pins 22, 26) Yes

No

Has the signal arrived at IC4801? (pin 70)

7 8
Check around the IC that is found to have failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy The panel is defective.

6

No Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer normal? Yes Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy. No

D

Waveforms
Input signal: Color-bar

1

IC4601 - pins 85, 91, 72 V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

2

IC4701 - pin 57 V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

3

IC4601 - pin 42 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

4

IC4601 - pin 45 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

4

IC4601 - pin 45 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

E

5

IC4601 - pin 49 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

6

IC4801 - pin 70 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

7

IC4801 - pin 22 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

7

IC4801 - pin 22 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

8

IC4801 - pin 26 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

55

1

2

3

4

A

No video from TV signal
=> TV

TV signal is not displayed on the screen. Yes Is the input selecter set to TV? (ANT-A or B)
B

No

Set the Input selector to TV. (ANT-A or B)

Yes Is a signal output normally from the FE to IC4601?(pins 55, 57) Yes Which signal is not output, main or sub signal? MAIN Is a signal output from IC4601? (pins 42, 45) Yes No Check around IC4601 and check the No communications between IC4601 and microcomuputer.If there was no ploblem replace IC4601. Check the circuit between IC4601 and IC4801 and replace broken parts. No Is a signal output from IC4601? (pin 49) Yes No Check around the FE and check the communications between FE and microcomuputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy.

2
SUB

3 4

5

C

Has the signal arrived at IC4801? (pins 22, 26) Yes

No

Has the signal arrived at IC4801? (pin 70)

7 8
No Check around the IC that is found to have failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy. The panel is defective.

6

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer normal? Yes Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.
D

No

Waveforms
Input signal: Color-bar

2
E

IC4601 - pin 57 V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

3

IC4601 - pin 42 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

4

IC4601 - pin 45 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

4

IC4601 - pin 45 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

5

IC4601 - pin 49 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

6

IC4801 - pin 70 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

7

IC4801 - pin 22 (Composite) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

7

IC4801 - pin 22 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

8

IC4801 - pin 26 (S-video) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

F

56
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

=> COMP/PC1

Image for the component signals is not displayed. Yes Is the function corresponding to selected signal input selected? Yes Has the signal arrived at IC4701 ? Yes No Check the communication between No the CN8804 and CN4004 or between CN8803 and CN4001 or around of jack. Check around IC4701 and check the communications between IC4701 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace IC4701. Check the circuit between IC4901 and IC5001 and replace broken parts.
C

No

Select the corresponding signal with the input selector.
B

Replace flexible cable.

Is a signal output from IC4701? (pins 30, 32, 34) Yes

No

13 14 15

Has the signal arrived at IC5001? (pins 43, 48, 54) Yes

No

16 17 18

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer nomal? Yes Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.

No

Check around the IC that is found to have a failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy. The panel is defective.

No

Waveforms
Input signal: Color-bar

D

13

IC4701 - pin 30 (component_PR) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

13

IC4701 - pin 30 (PC_R) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

14

IC4701 - pin 32 (component_Pb) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

14

IC4701 - pin 32 (PC_B) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

15

IC4701 - pin 34 (component_Y) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

15

IC4701 - pin 34 (PC_G) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

16

IC5001 - pin 43 (component) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

16

IC5001 - pin 43 (PC) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

E

17

IC5001 - pin 48 (component) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

17

IC5001 - pin 48 (PC) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

18

IC5001 - pin 54 (component) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

18

IC5001 - pin 54 (PC) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

57

1

2

3

4

A

=> PC

Image for the PC signal is not displayed. Yes Is the function corresponding to selected signal input selected?
B

No

Select the corresponding signal with the input selector.

Yes Has the signal arrived at IC4701? (pins 30, 32, 34) Yes No Check the communication between the CN4701 and around IC4901.

10 11 12
No Check around IC4701 and check the communications between IC4701 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace IC4701. Check the circuit between IC4701 and IC5001 and replace broken parts.

Is a signal output from IC4701? (pin 41, 43, 45) Yes

13 14 15

Has the signal arrived at IC5001? (pin 43, 48, 54) Yes
C

No

16 17 18
No Check around the IC that is found to have a failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy. The panel is defective.

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer nomal? Yes Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.

No

D

Waveforms
Input signal: Color-bar

10

IC4701 - pin 64 (PC_G) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

13

IC4701 - pin 30 (component_PR) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

13

IC4701 - pin 30 (PC_R) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

14

IC4701 - pin 32 (component_Pb) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

14

IC4701 - pin 32 (PC_B) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

11
E

IC4701 - pin 66 (PC_B) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

15

IC4701 - pin 34 (component_Y) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

15

IC4701 - pin 34 (PC_G) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

16

IC5001 - pin 43 (component) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

16

IC5001 - pin 43 (PC) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

12

IC4701 - pin 68 (PC_R) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

17

IC5001 - pin 48 (component) V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

17

IC5001 - pin 48 (PC) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

18

IC5001 - pin 54 (component) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

18

IC5001 - pin 54 (PC) V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

F

58
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

=> DTV

DTV (Digital Terrestrial Video) is not displayed. Yes Is the power-supply voltage of CN4105 normal? Yes When power ON, is RESET_DT (IC8401 - pin 60) Low after D+3.3 V standing up? Yes Do you communicate by TXD_DT (IC8401: pin 53) and RXDDT (IC8401: pin 52)? Yes Is the signal from IC6401 to IC8001? Yes Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced? Yes Finishing troubleshooting. No The panel is defective. No Check between IC6401 and IC8001. Exchange IC6401 if there is no problem.
C

No

Check between CN4105 and P8 (POWER SUPPLY Unit).
B

No

Check around IC6902.

No

Check between IC8401 (pins 52, 53) and IC6401 (pins 385, 466). Exchange IC6301.

NG

Replace the MAIN Assy.

No video from USB input
=> USB_R
D

The image of the USB card doesn't come out. Yes Has the function is selected Home Media Gallery by Home menu? Yes Is the contents list are appear? Yes Has the signal come to IC6401? Yes No Check around USB connecter or USB cable and check between pins 2, 3 of CN4110 and pins 302, 391 of IC6401. Check between IC6401 and IC8001. If there is no problem then replace IC6401. NG Replace USB cable.
E

No

Select the input of specification by the input switch.

No

Has USB memory or digital camerra NG Insert USB device such as is connected to USB connecter? USB flash memory.

Is the signal from IC6401 to IC8001? Yes Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced? Yes Replace the MAIN Assy.

No

No

The panel is defective.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

59

1

2

3

4

5.2.7 AUDIO SYSTEM

A

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Audio System
=> AU1 No Yes Is sound muting set? No Is the volume set to 0? No Yes Raise the volume, then check again. Cancel muting, then check again.

Has the sound been emitted from the speakers? Yes

B

Is not headphone inserted? Yes Sound of all functions does not output? Yes Check the speakers and speaker cables. Is it no problem? Yes Is a voltage (+16.5 V) supplied to IC9201? Yes

No

Pull out headphone, then check again.

No

Go to

A.

No

Replace the speakers or speaker cables.

No

Check the cables (CN8806) from the main power and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

C

Is not a signal output from CN9251? (pins 2, 4, 5, 7) 42 43 Yes Is not a PWM signal output from IC9201? 44 45 (pins 34, 38, 46, 50) Yes Is not a PWM signal output from IC9101? 46 47 (pins 52, 53, 54, 55) Yes
D

No

Check the CN9251 and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

No

Check between the LPF (L9255, L9256) and CN9251. Repair the failure points.

No

Check around the IC9101. Repair the failure points.

Is a signal input to IC9101? (pins 24, 25) Yes Has I2C communication signal arrived at IC9101?

No

48

Check between the input terminals and IC9101. Repair the failure points.

No

Check the peripheral circuits and the communication with the microcomputer and clock output of X9101. If there was no ploblem replace the MAP5601M.

Has the sound been emitted from the Audio out terminal?
E

No

Is a 12 V output from +12V_Reg output of IC9181 normal? Yes Are signals input to IC9151? (pins 2, 3, 5, 6) Yes Are signals output from IC9151? (pins 1, 7)

Check the IC9181 and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

Yes

49 50

Check the peripheral circuits and the communication with the microcomputer and clock output of X9101. If there was no ploblem replace the MAP5601M.

51

Check the IC9151 and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

F

B
60
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B
Has the sound been emitted from the Headphones? No Is sound muting set? No Is the volume set to 0? No Is a signal output from IC9101? (pins 38, 39) Yes Is a signal output from IC8871? (pins 1, 7) Yes Check the cables between CN8801 NG Replace the cables or SIDE IO Assy. and CN9351 or check around the Headphones jack. No Check the communications around the IC8871 and between the IC8871 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace BH3544F. No Yes Raise the volume, then check again. Yes Cancel muting, then check again.

52

Check around the IC9101 and repair the failure points.
B

53

C

Waveforms
Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30)

42

CN9251 - pins 2, 4 V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

43

CN9251 - pins 5, 7 V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

44

IC9201 - pins 34, 38 V: 10 V/div H: 5 μS/div

45

IC9201 - pins 44, 52 V: 10 V/div H: 5 μS/div

46

IC9101 - pins 52, 53 V: 2 V/div H: 5 μS/div

D

47

IC9101 - pins 54, 55 V: 2 V/div H: 5 μS/div

48

IC9101 - pins 24, 25 V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

49

IC9151 - pins 2, 3 V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

50

IC9151 - pins 5, 6 V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

51

IC9151 - pin 1, etc. V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

52

IC9101 - pins 38, 39 V: 1 V/div H: 1 mS/div

53

IC8871 - pins 1, 7 V: 1 V/div H: 1 mS/div

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

61

1

2

3

4

A

A
Has the sound of the Analog broadcasting output? Yes No Is a signal input to IC9101? (pins 28, 29) Yes Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace MAP5601M. No Check the communications between NG Replace the IC6001 and the IC6001 and the microcomputer repair the failure points. and between the IC6001 and IC9101.

Has the sound of the HDMI output?
B

No

Is a SPDIF signal output from IC5201? (pin 78) 54 Yes Is a SPDIF signal input to IC9101? (pin 4) Yes Check that the HDMI switch of the MENU is properly set.

No

Replace the IC5201.

Yes

No

54

Poor contact of the connector or FFC, or cable is defective. Replace FFC or cable.

NG

Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace MAP5601M.

Has the sound of the Digital broadcasting output?
C

No

Yes

Check the FFC and cables between the MAIN Assy and TANSHI Assy. Does not sound output even if replace them? No Is a I2S signal input to IC9101? (pins 100 to 102) Yes Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace the MAIN Assy. Is a signal input to IC9101? (pins 24 to 27, 32 to 37)

Yes

Poor contact of the connector or FFC, or cable is defective. Replace FFC or cable.

55 56 57

No Is a signal output from IC8401 of the MAIN Assy? Yes Check around IC8401 and repair the failure points.

No

Repare the DTB block.

D

Has the sound of the Analog RCA and PC inputs output? Yes

No

49 50
Yes

No Check between input terminal and IC9101 and repair the failure points.

Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace the MAIN Assy.

Has the sound of the side input output?

No

Check the cables between CN8801 NG and CN9351, and check around Replace the cables. the pin jack. OK Is a signal input to IC9101? (pins 30, 31) No Check between IC9101 and CN8801 and repair the failure points.

49 50

E

Yes Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace the MAIN Assy.

Waveforms
Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30)

54

IC5201 - pin 78 V: 1 V/div H: 1 μS/div

55

IC9101 - pin 106 V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div

56

IC9101 - pin 107 V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div

57

IC9101 - pin 108 V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div

F

62
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

Note: The figures to indicate the number of times the LED flashes when power-down occurs in the corresponding route.

5

DIGITAL ASSY IC3801 DCDC Converter 12
DIGI_DCDC_PD ADR_PD1

Block Diagram of the Power-Down Signal

5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN)

5.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL

5

ADDRESS L ASSY D3501 to D3504

S S

D13 to D20

AD1

ADDRESS S ASSY

S S
OR

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

AD1

6

6

D23 IC3604
PD MUTE Circuit
PD_MUTE_B DRF_SW EXT_PD

DRF_SW

X DRIVE ASSY
XDRV_PD XDD_PD XSUS_PD

D22

PDP-5010FD

X1

D3601 to D3605, D3608, D3612

Relay Control

OR
SCAN_PD SCN5V_PD YDRV_PD YDD_PD YSUS_PD PS_PD

D21

7

7

Y DRIVE ASSY

Protection Circuit

Y1

IC3601
Module Microcomputer
PD_TRIG_B
8

8 E A D C B

63

F

1

2

3

4

5.3.2 PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS
Prediction of failure symptoms when a PD (power-down) is generated
A
Red LED Operating Flashing PD Count

Defective Assy

PD Outline

Checkpoint

Possible Defective Part

Remarks

POWER SUPPLY Unit Failure in the POWER SUPPLY Unit 2 POWER X DRIVE Assy VSUS UVP Y DRIVE Assy SCAN Assy X DRIVE Assy VH UVP 3 SCAN Y DRIVE Assy Y SUS BLOCK VH DC/DC converter Connectors disconnection detection Connectors disconnection detection IC5V UVP VNOFS UVP CN2001,CN2301 CN3509 CN2801,CN2901,CN2902,CN3001, CN3002,CN3101 SCAN IC IC5V DC/DC Y MSK BLOCK VNOFS DC/DC Vprst UVP 15VDD UVP YPRST Regulator 15VDC/DC Y MSK BLOCK VKOFS1_2 Regulator VKOFS3 UVP Y MSK BLOCK VKOFS3 Regulator VKOFS4 UVP Y MSK BLOCK VKOFS4 Regulator 7 Y-SUS Y DRIVE Assy Center electric potential detection PD VADR UVP ADDRESS Assy 8 ADRS DIGITAL Assy X DRIVE Assy Y DRIVE Assy X DRIVE Assy 9 XDRIVE DIGITAL Assy Connectors disconnection detection Connectors disconnection detection 15VDD UVP 10 X-DCDC X DRIVE Assy VXKOFS1 UVP VADR UVP Connectors disconnection detection Y RESONANCE BLOCK ADDRESS RESONACE BLOCK TCP CN1601,CN1602,CN1801,CN1802 CN3501 to CN3508 CN1202 to CN1206 CN2302 to CN2306 CN1001 CN3510 CN1201 X SUS BLOCK 15VDC/DC VXKOFS1 Regulator X OFFSET BLOCK VXKOFS2 Regulator VXKOFS2 UVP L1201,R1217 Q1402 Q1405,Q1406 Q1302,Q1304 Q1403,Q1404 Q1301,Q1303 Q1108,Q1116,Q1112,Q1119 IC3801 Q3841, Q3861, Q3881 L3841, L3861, L3881 R3820, R3848, R3868, R3888 SCAN IC Q2764,D2768,R2764 Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334 D2606,Q2709,Q2710 Q2604,Q2605,IC2602 Q2662,R2669 Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334 Q2705,Q2702 Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334 Q2706,Q2703 Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334 Q2707,Q2704 Q2106 to Q2109,Q2111,Q2113, D2104 to D2107 LMSK is short-circuited. LMSK is short-circuited. LMSK is short-circuited. LMSK is short-circuited. Q2217 to Q2224 IC2601,IC2603,D2604 Y SUS BLOCK SCAN IC X SUS BLOCK Q2217 to Q2224 SCAN IC Q1218 to Q1224,Q1226 VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUTSUSGND are short-circuited. VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUTSUSGND are short-circuited. X SUS BLOCK Q1219 to Q1224 VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUTSUSGND are short-circuited. VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUTSUSGND are short-circuited.

B

DIGITAL Assy SCAN Assy SCN-5V Y DRIVE Assy

4

C

VKOFS1_2 UVP 6 Y-DCDC Y DRIVE Assy

D

E
11 X-SUS X DRIVE Assy Center electric potential detection PD 3.3V, 2.5V, 1.1V UVP, OVP, OCP

X OFFSET BLOCK X RESONANCE BLOCK Abnormality in the DC-DC converter control IC Periphery of the DC-DC converter

12

DIG-DCDC DIGITAL Assy

5.1V OCP Connectors POWER SUPPLY Unit disconnection detection 15 UNKNOW DIGITAL Assy ModuleUcom can not detection Connectors disconnection detection

FU3801 Abnormality in 5.1V input (include abnormality in the protection fuse) P4 CN3801 EXT_PD line: Open EXT_PD line: Open It becomes "UNKNOW" except above-mentioned PD detection condition.

F

Each PD line of ModuleUcom

UVP: Under Voltage Protect , OVP: Over Voltage Protect

64
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

How to distinguish which connector is disconnected
A

Assy

Connector
CN1001 CN1201 CN1202 CN1203 CN2001 CN2301 CN2302 CN2303 to CN2306 CN2501, CN2502 CN2901, CN3001

To which Assy the Connector is Connected
DIGITAL Assy POWER SUPPLY Unit (drive system power) POWER SUPPLY Unit (ADR system power) ADDRESS Assy DIGITAL Assy POWER SUPPLY Unit (drive system power) POWER SUPPLY Unit (ADR system power) ADDRESS Assy SCAN A, B, C, D Assy Y DRIVE Assy

LED Flashing Count
5 (XDRIVE)

Screen Display
Black screen

X DRIVE Assy

8 (ADRS) 8 (ADRS) 3 (SCAN) 3 (SCAN) 8 (ADR) 8 (ADR)
B

Y DRIVE Assy

4 (SCN-5V)

SCAN A, B, C, D Assy

CN2801, CN2902 CN3002, CN3101 CN1602, CN1802 CN1601, CN1801

4 (SCN-5V) SCAN A, B, C, D Assy DIGITAL Assy X DRIVE Assy, Y DRIVE Assy 8 (ADRS) 8 (ADRS)

ADDRESS Assy

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

65

1

2

3

4

A

X Drive PD system
Resonance center electric potential 1 Resonance center electric potential 2 Increase or decrease voltage detection XSUS_PD Increase or decrease voltage detection

B

X_CN

XDRV_PD

15VDD

Decrease voltage detection Decrease voltage detection Decrease voltage detection

VXKOFS1

XDD_PD

VXKOFS2

C

Y Drive PD system
Resonance center electric potential Increase or decrease voltage detection

YSUS_PD

IC5V

Increase or decrease voltage detection DCDC converter drive stop

SCN5V_PD

D

SCAN Hi Unconnect SCAN Low Unconnect FFC disconnection detection 15VDD Decrease voltage detection

YDRV_PD

E

VNOFS VKOFS1_2 VKOFS3 VKOFS4 VPRST Decrease voltage detection Decrease voltage detection YDD_PD

F

VH

Increase or decrease voltage detection

SCAN_PD

66
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

Note : The figures 1 to f indicate the number of times the LED flashes when shut-down occurs in the corresponding route.

DIGITAL ASSY
IC4801 VDEC IC8404 EEPROM

5

Block Diagram of the Shutdown Signal

5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN)

5.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL

5

MAIN ASSY 8
2 =>1 SW
SCL_MA SDA_M

IC5201 HDMI_RX

IC8401 EMMA2_UCOM

STOP_SQ IC3301 SQ_LSI

SCL_MB SDA_M

8 1 7
IC8001 MULTI_LSI

15

TXD_SQ RXD_SQ CLK_SQ CE_SQ BUSY_SQ

12 12
TXD_DT RXD_DT PSIZE MODEL TXD_IC3 RXD_IC3 REQ_IC3

IC3607 MONO MULTI

IC7302 POD Interface IC6903 EEPROM

12 1

IC7001 TV-G slicer

12

IC6401 BCM7038

1

SQ_NON

FU3801 5.1V_FUSE

IC6301 BCM3517

12
IC5001 ADC

8

RST2

IC3801 3.3V_DDCON

6
SCL_AV5 SDA_AV5
M1
5V ⇔ 3.3V Converter

6

1 8
D11

IC3601 MODULE _UCOM

IC3805 3.3V_RST_IC

TANSHI ASSY 8 5
A_NG_B
V+3_3V_D4

U6101 AD-FE IC6001 MPX IC4601 AV SW IC4701 RGB SW U6001 A-FE SCL_AV SDA_AV

3

PDP-5010FD
TXD_MD RXD_MD REQ_MD
USB Power OVP Block ANT_POW_DE

IO3

M9

IC9101 MSP

SCL SDA E_SCL E_SDA

2 1 4
EMG_USB

7

7

IC9201 D- Amp

5 7
RST2

2
IC8406 AND-Gate IC4403 3chDC-

OTW IC8301 IF_UCOM

9

TXD_IF RXD_IF CLK_IF BUSY_IF CE_IF REQ_IF

13

D23

TEMP

IC3605 DAC1 IC3606 DAC2 IC3602 EEPROM

IO4

M6

TE1

11
TEMP2
RST4

13

EMG_DDC
IC8406 AND-Gate

BUS
IC3902 EEPROM IC3901 SENSOR

TH9091 Temp. sensor

I2C UART

M4

10
FAN NG1

V+12V
FAN NG2

V+6_5V

V+5_1V

PANEL SENSOR ASSY
3-wire serial
8

Internal FAN

8 E

M5

10

External FAN

Status notice line

67
A D C B

F

F

E

B

A

D

C

68
Log Indication in Factory Mode

Frequency of LED Flashing

Major Type MAIN
RTRY SQNO BUSY SQ-LSI VER-HS VER-MS EEPROM MD-IIC DAC1 DAC2 – TMP-H – TMP-NG TMP-L Low temperature abnormality in the panel temperature sensor RST2 – IIC communication line of IC3605 IIC communication line of IC3606 IC3605, IC3601 IC3606, IC3601 Is the output voltage (3.3 V) of the DC-DC converter low? TP3881, TP3882 The 5.1 V power is not output. POWER SUPPLY Unit,FU3801 High temperature abnormality in the panel temperature sensor PANEL SENSOR Assy (IC3901) BACKUP IIC communication line of IC3902 IIC communication line of IC3602 Check the model number of the DIGITAL Assy and the IC3302, IC3601, IC3602 A shutdown occurs if the SEQ-PROG that has been stored in backup destination of the sequence LSI. memory does not coincide with the actual SEQ-PROG. The written SEQ_PROG is incoherent with data on the DIGITAL Assy. Check if the video sync signal is input to IC3301. BUSY_SQ Check the model number of the DIGITAL Assy and the IC3302, IC3601 destination of the sequence LSI. CLK_SQ/TXD_SQ, etc. SQ_IC communication not established. IC3301 may not have properly started up. IC3301, IC3601 CN3201, IC3202, IC3301 A shutdown occurs if IC3301 has not properly started up (a communication failure between IC3301 and IC3302 [FLASH]). IC3301, IC3601 If BUSY_SQ remains high, a shutdown is generated.

Detailed Type SUB

Checkpoint

Possible Defective Part Remarks

5.4.2 SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSIS

1
– AUDIO – – CN3001, CN4101 IC8301, IC8401 IC8001, IC8401 IF Communication line between IF and MAIN Communication line between MULTI and MAIN MA-3L MULTI Check the communication lines (TXD_IC3/RXD_IC3). MODULE – Speaker terminals AUDIO_AMP Periphery of the cable between IO3 and M8, and IO6 and P5 Communication line between MAIN and MOD Periphery of the cable between D11 and M1 Check if cables are firmly connected. MA-IIC Check the communication lines (SCL_AV/SDA_AV). Check the communication lines (SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5). Check the communication lines (SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5). Check the communication lines (SCL_MB/SDA_MB). Check the communication lines (SDRAM). Defective SDRAM Check the communication lines (SCL_AV/SDA_AV). Check the communication lines (SCL_MB/SDA_MB). Check the communication lines (SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5). Check the communication lines (SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5). IC6001, IC8401 IC8301, IC8401 – CN4103 IC4310 FE1 MSPMAP AV-SW RGB-SW VDEC SDRAM ADC HDMI FE2 US-MSP – MAIN Communication line between IF and MAIN – IIC communication line between US_MSP and MAIN IIC communication line between Tuner (ANT-A) and MAIN IIC communication line between MSP/MAP and MAIN IIC communication line between AV-SW and MAIN IIC communication line between RGB-SW and MAIN IIC communication line between M-VDEC and MAIN IIC communication line between VDEC and SDRAM IIC communication line between ADC and MAIN IIC communication line between HDMI_RX and MAIN IIC communication line between Tuner (ANT-B) and MAIN U6101,IC8401 IC9101, IC8401 IC4601, IC8401 IC4701, IC8401 IC4801, IC8401 IC4801, IC4802 IC5001, IC8401 IC5201, IC8401 U6001, IC8401 FAN1 FAN FAN2 Dirt attached to the fan motor Periphery of the cable between FAN and M4 Periphery of the fan control regulator Check the fan. (SD10 does not detect it at the temperature that a fan does not turn.) Check if cables are firmly connected. Check that the voltage outputs it. Check the fan. (SD10 does not detect it at the temperature that fans do not turn.) FAN NG Check if cables are firmly connected. Check that the voltage outputs it. Dirt attached to the fan motor – Periphery of the FHD FAN CONNECT FHD FAN CONNECT Assy Periphery of the cable between FA1 and M5, FAN and M4, and FA2 and FA5 CN9551 to CN9555,CN4108 Periphery of the fan control regulator IC4303

1

Blue 1

Abnormality in the Sequence LSI

Communication error Drive stop Busy Incoherent version (hardware, software)

Incoherent version (memory, software)

DIGITAL Assy EEPROM

PANEL SENSOR Assy EEPROM

Blue 2

Failure in IIC communication with the module microcomputer

Check the pull-up resistor of the IIC control line and the power to the corresponding IC. IC3602, IC3601 PANEL SENSOR Assy (IC3902), Check the pull-up resistor of the IIC control line and the power to the corresponding IC. IC3601 Check the pull-up resistor of the IIC control line and the power to the corresponding IC. Check the pull-up resistor of the IIC control line and the power to the corresponding IC.

DAC1

DAC2

Blue 3

Abnormality in RST2 power decrease

Blue 4

Abnormality in panel temperature

2

2

Blue 5

Short-circuiting of the speakers / D-AMP temperature abnormality

Blue 6

Failure in communication with the module microcomputer

If RST2 does not become high after the unit is turned on, a shutdown will be generated in several seconds. Check if V + 5.1 V is started. Also check if the FU3801 on the DIGITAL Assy has been melted. If TEMP1 that is read by the module microcomputer is 85 °C or higher, a shutdown will be generated. PANEL SENSOR Assy (IC3901) A shutdown occurs if the reading of TEMP1 detected by the module microcomputer is –20°C or less. Also check the connection with the PANEL SENSOR Assy. JA9301 Check if any speaker cable is in contact with the chassis. IC9201, IC9101 Check if the AMP output is short-circuited. CN8803,CN4001,CN8806,P5 Check if cables are firmly connected. Check the communication lines (TXD_MOD/RXD_MOD/REQ_MOD). IC3151, IC8401 Check the communication lines (TXD_IF/RXD_IF/CLK_IF/BUSY_IF/CE_IF/REQ_IF).

IF microcomputer

Blue 7

Failure in main microcomputer 3-wire serial communication

MULTI processor

PDP-5010FD

Check the communication lines (SCL_TU/SDA_TU or SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5).

Blue 8

Failure in IIC communication with the main microcomputer

Tuner 1 MSP/MAP AV switch RGB switch Main VDEC VDEC SDRAM AD/PLL HDMI Tuner 2

3

3

US-MSP

Blue 9

Failure in communication with the main microcomputer

Check the communication lines (TXD_IF/RXD_IF/CLK_IF/BUSY_IF/CE_IF/REQ_IF).

FAN1

Blue 10

FAN NG

FAN2

4

4

Log Indication in Factory Mode

Frequency of LED Flashing

Major Type MAIN
Temperature sensor or its periphery – PS/RST TEMP2 – Periphery of the temperature sensor Periphery of the cable between IO4 and M6 Startup of BCM7038 TH9091 CN8804, CN4004 IC6401 – TEMP2 A shutdown occurs because of high temperature.

Detailed Type SUB

Checkpoint

Possible Defective Part Remarks

5

5
RETRY DE-BCM DE-FE DE-CAS DTUNER – IC6401, AWV2497 – – DE-VBI DE-EP1 TV-G HOME-G DTVMID DTVAPP M-DCDC DTV middleware DTV application HNM circuit TV-GUIDE function (Data from broadcast wave) Periphery of VBI slicer IC7001 IC6903, IC6401 Communication line between BCM7038 and MAIN Periphery of BCM7038 Front-end block (ANT-A) Check the BCM7038 and its periphery device Check the BCM7038 and its periphery device Check the BCM7038 and its periphery device Check the BCM7038 and its periphery device Check the BCM7038 and its periphery device Check the BCM7038 and its periphery device IC6401 IC6401 IC6401, U6101 IC7302, IC6401, POD Assy RST-MA RELAY The 5.1 V power is not output EMG_DDC Periphery of the cable between P8 and M3 HMG START HNM power supply IIC communication line between EEPROM and MAIN – Periphery of connector CN4105 CN4111 IC4309, Q4304 IC8404, IC8401 DC-DC converter or its periphery, RST2 EMG_USB The 12 V power is not output, RST4 The 6.5 V power is not output POWER SUPPLY Unit DC-DC converter IC4403, Q4404 IC4309, Q4304 POWER SUPPLY Unit POWER SUPPLY Unit Check if V + 5.1 V is started. Check if the DC-DC converter is overloaded. Check if cables are firmly connected. Check if cables are firmly connected.

Blue 11

High temperature of the unit

DTV startup error

DTV communication error BCM7038 is abnormal Tuner1 or Tuner2

TEMP2 Check if cables are firmly connected. Check the startup of the BCM7038 and the communication line with MAIN. Check the startup of the BCM7038 and the communication line with MAIN.

Card I/F IC

Blue 12

Digital Tuner

VBI Slicer EEPROM

TV Guide

Home Gallery

Middleware

Application

6 E D C

6

DC-DC Converter power decrease

Blue 13

Failure in the power supply

Check if V + 3.3 V_D4 is started. Check if the voltage at a waveform check point is 5 V. Check if V + 12 V is started. Check if V + 6.5 V is started.

POWER SUPPLY

Blue 14

Home Media Gallery

HMG startup error

Check if the voltage at a waveform check point is 5 V. Check the communication lines (SCL_EP/SDA_EP).

PDP-5010FD

Blue 15

Main EEPROM

Main EEPROM communication error MA-EEP

7 A B

7 8

8

69

F

1

2

3

4

5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION
5.5.1 INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE
A

Information on symptoms that do not constitute failure
Symptom
HDMI: Symptoms concerning the input format and settings The picture color for an INPUT 4 to 7 signal is not correct. The video signal to INPUT 4 to 7 is not displayed, and a message is displayed. The audio signal input to the INPUT 4 to 5 is not output. No HDMI signal is input. The color setting for INPUT 4 to 7 is not compatible with that of the output equipment. Check whether the color setting is YPbPr or RGB. A unsupported video signal is input.

Cause, item to check, information

B

The audio setting for INPUT 4 to 5 is any setting and a video signal is not input. If the audio setting is any setting to output an analog audio signal, the HDMI signal must be input. (If a DVI device is to be connected, use a DVI-HDMI conversion cable.) If the HDMI video signal is not input, the analog audio signal is not output. The setting on the side of the HDMI output equipment is wrong. Example: Dolby Digital Check that the connected cable supports HDMI Category 2. (As the clock frequency for the 1080p signal is triple that for the 1080i signal, signal degradation caused by a cable must not be neglected. A cable supporting HDMI Category 2 can be used for the 1080p signal. Although some conventional cables can support the 1080p signal, some others cannot.)

No sound of signals to INPUT 4 to 7 is output.

The 1080p input signal is not displayed properly or at all, although the 1080i input signal is displayed properly.

DIGITAL OUT Playback of the signal from the DIGITAL audio output connector is possible, but recording is not possible. Miscellaneous
C

The video signal output from the DIGITAL connector is copy-protected.

The no-signal off function is not activated. The no-operation off function is not activated. Power management does not function. The AUTO SETUP function is not activated. Control via the SR connector is not possible. The audio signal from the PC is not output. The picture-quality setting (AV Selection) is not stored. The picture size changes arbitrary.

The no-signal off and no-operation off functions are effective only if video (composite, S video, component, HDMI [excluding PC]) input or TV input is selected. Power Management is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. It is not effective with HDMI-PC signal input. The Auto Setup function is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. This function does not work if an analog PC signal is not input, even if the INPUT PC is selected. Wrong connection of the cable to the PC INPUT (AUDIO) connector is suspected. Wrong connection of the cable to the SR connector is suspected. The picture-quality setting is stored for each input. As the setting is changed when another input is selected, the user may have a false idea that the setting is not stored. The Auto Size setting is set to ON. The orbiter function for minimizing the effects of phosphor burn is activated. Although the setting for this function can be changed on the Home menu, retaining the factory setting is strongly recommended. The component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the S video (even if no signal is input to the component video connector, merely having something plugged in to the connector will result in judgment that a signal is being fed in and the component video connector takes priority). (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video) The S Video or component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the composite video. (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video)

D

The display position of the screen changes slightly while the screen is on.

The video signal to the S video connector is not displayed.

The video signal to the composite video connector is not displayed.

SUPPLEMENT: On the video setting for HDMI
E

There are three types of HDMI output formats: color difference 4:4:4, color difference 4:2:2, and RGB4:4:4. (The proportions, such as 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, represent those of the amount of data for video signal components. For example, as for color difference 4:4:4, the proportion of the amount of data as for Y, Cb, and Cr is 4:4:4.) It is required to make the settings of the PDP according to the settings of the output equipment. For usual operation, however, set them to AUTO. If the color is inappropriate, make the settings manually. In the HDMI system, video signals are coded at 24 bits per pixel and transmitted as a series of 24-bit pixels. In a case of color difference 4:4:4, Y, Cb, and Cr use 8 bits each. In a case of color difference 4:2:2, Y, Cb, and Cr use 12 bits each, but Cb and Cr are transmitted at a half sampling rate of Y. This unit is capable of processing the upper 10 bits out of 12 bits of video data. Recent high-end DVD players, such as Pioneer DV-79AVi, are capable of outputting 10-bit color-difference signals. In general, it is said that picture quality for color difference 4:2:2 format is assumed to be higher, because human eyes are more sensitive to luminance than to colors. In the case of RGB4:4:4, R, G, and B use 8 bits each.

F

70
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.5.1.1 CONFIRMATION ON THE HDMI CONTROL FUNCTION
When you use the HDMI Control (HDMI-CEC) function, if the unit does not function properly, such as not being able to control or recognize connected equipment, check the following:

A

" Confirmation of the manufacturer of the connected equipment
Check if the connected equipment was manufactured by Pioneer and if it supports the HDMI Control function. If its manufacturer is not Pioneer, proper operations are not guaranteed.

" Confirmation of connections
Check if the unit is connected properly, as shown in the figures below: (For details, refer to "Making the HDMI Control connections" in the Operating instructions.)

B

4

5 4 5

4

5

Rear view
4 5

Rear view
4 5

Rear view

C

Optical digital cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark)

Optical digital cable (commercially available)

HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark)

HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark)

AV amp

BD player AV amp BD player

D

BD player

Example 1: When an AV amplifier that supports HDMI Control is connected

Example 2: When an AV amplifier that does not support HDMI Control is connected

Example 3: When an AV amplifier is not connected

Check that the following conditions are met: • The connected equipment must support the HDMI Control function. • The equipment must be connected to the INPUT connector that has been selected in "Input Setting" on the HDMI Control Setting menu. • The connections must be made properly, as shown in the above figures (in a case where an AV device, such as an AV amplifier, and a DVD recorder/BD player are connected, in a case where only a DVD recorder/BD player is connected, and in a case where an AV device, such as an AV amplifier, which does not support HDMI-CEC, is connected). • When an AV device that supports the HDMI Control function is connected, it must be connected between the PDP and a DVD recorder/BD player. • The HDMI Control function must be activated on the connected equipment (DVD recorder, BD player, AV device [AV amplifier, etc.]). (Refer to the Operating instructions of the connected equipment.)

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

71

1

2

3

4

A

" Confirmation of the number of connected devices
Check that the number of connected devices does not exceed the maximum number for guaranteed operations. Equipment
DVD recorder BD player AV System

Maximun Number
2 2 1

B

" Confirmation of settings
Check that the settings for the HDMI Control function are properly made. (For details, refer to "Setting the HDMI Control" in the Operating instructions.) Check that the following conditions are met: • "Input Setting" on the HDMI Control Setting menu must be set to the same input as that to which the equipment that supports the HDMI Control function is connected. • When Power Off Control, Power-On Ready, or Hold Sound Status are to be used, their settings must be On.
C

" Confirmation of operations
Check that the HDMI Control function works properly. (1) Connect a device that supports the HDMI Control function. (2) Perform the procedures that are required after changing connections, which are described in "Making the HDMI Control connections" in the Operating instructions. 1 Turn on the plasma television and all the connected devices. 2 Confirm that the setting in “Input Setting” for “HDMI Control Setting” is properly entered according to the connected devices. Also confirm the HDMI Control related settings in the connected devices. 3 Switch to the HDMI input terminals to which the devices are connected to check if audio and video images are properly output and displayed. 4 Try turning off the plasma television, then turn the power back on to the plasma television. (3) Perform "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" on the HDMI Control Setting menu. (For details, refer to "Power On/Off Test" in the Operating instructions.) If the following occurs even if the operation check is performed properly, a failure, such as breakage of the HDMI cable, problems on the side of the connected device, and problems with the MAIN Assy, may be suspected: • "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" cannot be selected (the items are grayed) • The connected device cannot be turned on/off. In some cases, an operation check using another HDMI input connector may be required in order to narrow down the cause.

D

E

F

72
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.5.2 FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

High-temperature protection function 1
If the panel temperature (TEMP1) reaches 80 °C, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased to lower the temperature of the panel. • This function is activated based on the TEMP1 temperature. • The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be decreased 8 per 5 seconds. • The lowest limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge is about 700. • The maximum count of plasma discharge will begin to increase gradually if the panel temperature falls to the specified temperature.

A

High-temperature protection function 2
If the panel temperature (TEMP1) reaches 55 °C, the plasma-discharge count that is determined based on the input APL will be decreased. In actual operation, the ABL adjustment value will be offset. • This function is activated based on the TEMP1 temperature. • The ABL adjustment value will be decreased by one step per 30 seconds. • The ABL adjustment value will begin to increase gradually if the panel temperature falls to the specified temperature.
B

Panel protection function 1 (protection against still picture)
If a still picture is displayed for 3 minutes or more, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased to minimize the effects of phosphor burn. • This function is activated after detection if the displayed picture is still (the picture will be considered to be still if only the mouse cursor is moved). • The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be decreased 8 per 5 seconds. • The lowest limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge is about 700 (it takes about 15 minutes to reach the lowest limit, although the required time varies depending on the displayed picture). • The maximum count of plasma discharge will begin to increase gradually if the displayed picture is changed to animated picture. Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1.

C

Panel protection function 2 (SCAN IC protection)
If a particular load is applied to the SCAN IC, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased. Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1.

Panel protection function 3 (protection against panel cracking)
A bright window, as shown in the figure on the right, on the screen increases the heat of the panel. If such a pattern is recognized on the screen, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased. Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1. Detection example: SCAN IC protection

D

2000

Maximum count of plasma discharge

High-temperature protection function 1/ panel protection functions 1, 2, and 3 High-temperature protection function 1/panel protection: The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased if the panel temperature reaches 80 °C. 700

E

Detection example: Protection against panel cracking

High-temperature protection function 2 The count of plasma discharge with regard to the APL will be decreased if the panel temperature becomes 55 °C or higher.
F

APL (average picture level)
PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

73

1

2

3

4

5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION
5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF FUNCTION
A

Function: It is an operational mode where the digital signal processing performs circuit operation but the power is not supplied to the panel driving system (Vsus, VAddress) in order to avoid a power down (PD). Application: 1. When it is necessary to check whether the signal output is correctly reaching the drive system in a repairing activity etc. 2. In the case of a PD, to determine whether the problem is with the panel drive-power supply or with the other system power supply.
B

Method: 1. Short-circuit between the specified location of the POWER SUPPLY Unit and GND (Multi base section recommended), using a jumper with alligator clips (refer to the photos below). 2. Execute [DRV S00] by RS-232C command. ([DRV S01] for release) Supplemental explanation: • When the panel drive-power is in OFF state, there will be no PD, except PS_PD, as the PD signal has been muted. • If the clip is removed in the OFF state of the panel drive-power, PD will take place at the instance of clip removal. Therefore, be sure to remove the clip after turning the power OFF. • Under RS-232C command control, [DRV S01] (release) is possible during power ON. However, there is a possibility of damaging the set. Therefore, make this operation only after turning the power OFF. • Command [DRV S00/S01] is effective even during standby. • When the main power switch is set to OFF, no command is accepted. • When the AC power cord is unplugged, the panel drive-power OFF state established by the [DRV S00] command is canceled. (The panel drive-power OFF state remains in effect even if the main power switch is set to OFF after that command is sent.)

C

When the panel drive-power is ON

When the panel drive-power is OFF

POWER SUPPLY Unit
D

POWER SUPPLY Unit

DRF-SW-B (TEST PIN)

DRF-SW-B (TEST PIN)

Alligator clip
E

Multi base
F

GND

Multi base

74
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.6.2 SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL

Block diagram
The internal fan cools down the MTB and Power blocks. The external fans cool down the whole unit. Internal fan External fans

A

DIGITAL Assy
Module_Ucom

TANSHI Assy
TEMP2

If an emergency signal is detected, it will be transmitted.

OR

FHD FAN CONNECT Assy

B

Main_Ucom
The Main microcomputer controls the IF microcomputer as a port expander.

R

Detection of disconnection FAN_VCC1 0 to 12V

R Detection of disconnection FAN_2_ REG FAN_VCC2 0 to 12V

FAN_1_ REG

TEMP2 FAN_NG1 FAN_ON1 FAN_CONT1

IF_Ucom
FAN_NG2 FAN_ON2 FAN_CONT2

VOLTAGE CONTROL VOLTAGE CONTROL

C

MAIN Assy Operation specifications

Internal FAN
HIGH LOW

D

Temperature SD
STOP 36.0 ºC 39.0 ºC 39.0 ºC 42.0 ºC 62.0 ºC

DAC output DAC2

External FAN
E

DAC1 STOP 0xFF 36.5 ºC 38.5 ºC 46.0 ºC 60.0 ºC 62.0 ºC

Notes:
• The operating temperature of the fan is higher than the ambient temperature, because the sensor temperature is read by the microcomputer. • If the critical values for signals are displayed in the address circuit, the fan may be activated or be rotated at higher speed in response to values lower than the set temperature values shown above. • When the temperature rises, the sensor voltage of TEMP2 decreases. • When the voltage of the DAC output for external FAN decreases, rotation speed of FAN rises.
PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

F

75

1

2

3

4

5.6.3 PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY

A

Protection of the Power Amplifier
Circuit configuration
TANSHI Assy
OTW DIGITAL POWER AMP IC A_NG_B PULL_D

MAIN Assy
OTW A_NG_B PULL_D IF_UCOM MAIN_UCOM

B

Specifications for port monitoring
Port Name
A_NG_B OTW

SD/PD Indication
AUDIO AUDIO

Active
Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L." 30 mS ∗ 3 times Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L." 130 mS ∗ 3 times

Monitoring conditions
RST4 = "H" (always) (Monitoring starts 2 sec after the above conditions are established.)

Operation
The main CPU operations described below will be performed when either "A_NG_B = L" or "OTW = L" is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions.

Operation specifications of the main CPU
(1) When a shutdown decision is made by the main CPU • After a warning indication is displayed for 5 sec, a shutdown is generated (the blue LED flashes 5 times). • A warning indication is displayed for all input-signal types. • Example of a warning indication: "The speaker terminals are short-circuited. After reconnection, turn the unit on again." (For 50-inch models) (For 42-inch models, an indication declaring a forced power-off is displayed.) (2) Display conditions When the panel is on: A warning indication is displayed immediately. When the panel is off: A warning indication is not displayed immediately but is displayed when the panel is turned on. Note: A warning indication is displayed each time the panel is turned on if the conditions for a shutdown persist.

C

Conditions for resetting the circuits
The circuits will be reset upon Standby ON/OFF.

D

E

F

76
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Power supply and DC-DC converter
Circuit configuration
POWER SUPPLY Unit
AC_DET V+3.3V_UCOM Inverter V+12V SW_REG MAIN POWER SW V+5.1V PULL_U RST4 PULL_D AND Voltage detection Startup Main ucom ACTIVE

MAIN Assy
RST3

MAIN_UCOM AC shutdown detection

IF_UCOM

B

V+6.5V PULL_U PULL_D

V+5.1V PULL_U PULL_D V+3.3V_D PULL_U V+5V_USB Overvoltage Detection EMG_ USB AND RST2 PSW1 Voltage detection DC_DC Converter output control PON/POFF Command

RELAY

DC/DC Converter EMG_DDC

MODULE_Ucom

Command

C

DIGITAL ASSY

Specifications for port monitoring
Port Name
RST2

SD/PD Indication
ASIC power (M-DCDC)

Active

Monitoring conditions

Operation
The SD timer starts when "RST2 = L" is detected under monitoring conditions. If "RST3 = H," "M_SW_DET_B = H," or "RST4 = L" is detected, or if a power-down or shutdown in the module microcomputer system is not generated, the unit waits for 30 mS. Then, if the SD timer continues to count for 2 sec or more, a shutdown is determined, and a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 13 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on. If RST2 is H, a restoration process starts according to the latest power-on/-off status. If "RST3 = H" (AC_OFF) is detected under the monitoring conditions, a power-off process starts. Monitoring of the RST3 port is continued, while monitoring of other ports is interrupted. Communication is controlled only by the IF microcomputer. The port outputs are set as specified. If the signal at the RST3 port continues to be H after 30 mS of waiting, monitoring is continued. If RST3 is L, a restoration process starts according to the latest power-on/-off status.

Shutdown occurs when the • Panel ON (RST4 = H and signal is "L." PSW1 = L) for 5 sec after PSW1 is ON. • While awaiting restoration or of RST2 (RST2 = L) for 2 sec while the unit is ON.

D

RST3

AC power

AC_OFF when the signal is • Active STB (including SD/PD statuses) "H." • Functional STB • Panel ON • (Areas other than North America) While the main power switch is set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H) • (North America) While the main power switch is set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H) • While awaiting restoration of AC power (RST3 = H) • While awaiting restoration of RST2 (RST2 = L) • While awaiting restoration of RST4 (RST4 = L) Shutdown occurs if the signal is "L." for 5 sec after RELAY is ON. or for 2 sec while the unit is ON or in Functional STB. • Functional STB • Panel ON • (Areas other than North America) While the main power switch is set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H) • While awaiting restoration of RST2 (RST2 = L) • While awaiting restoration of RST4 (RST4 = L)

E

RST4

MAIN power (RELAY)

The SD timer starts when "RST4 = L" (power-off of devices in the functional STB system) is detected under monitoring conditions. The RST4 initialization process starts, and input monitoring, communication setting, and output-terminal setting are performed. The RST4-SD timer starts. If either "RST3 = H" or "M_SW_DET_B = H" is detected, or if a power-down or shutdown in the module microcomputer system is not generated, the unit waits for 30 mS. Then, if the SD timer continues to count for 2 sec or more, a shutdown is determined, and a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 13 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on. If RST4 is H, a restoration process starts according to the latest power-on/-off status.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

77

1

2

3

4

A

Fan and temperature sensor
Circuit configuration
TANSHI Assy
SENSOR TEMP2 FAN_12V FAN 1

MAIN Assy

V+3_3V_UCOM PULL_U

V+3_3V_UCOM PULL_U TEMP2 FAN ON1

Drive Circuit

FAN CONT1 IF_UCOM FAN_NG1 (H act)

B
V+3_3V_UCOM

FHD FAN CONNECT Assy
FAN FAN_12V Drive Circuit OR FAN

PULL_U FAN ON2 FAN CONT2 DAC FAN_NG2 (H act)

FAN

PANEL SENSOR Assy
SENSOR

DIGITAL Assy
TEMP1 MODULE_ UCOM MAIN_UCOM

C

PULL_D

Specifications for port monitoring
Port Name
FAN_NG1

SD/PD Indication
FAN1

Active
Shutdown occurs when the signal is "H." 1 S ∗ 3 times

Monitoring conditions
RST4 = H and FAN_ON1 = H (Monitoring starts 3 sec after the above conditions are established.)

Operation
If FAN_NG1 (for details on detection logic, see "File of fan-control specifications") is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 10 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on. If FAN_NG2 (for details on detection logic, see "File of fan-control specifications") is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 10 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on. If any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown are detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, a warning indication will be displayed for 30 sec, after which a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 11 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on. If any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, those changes in status will be transmitted to the main microcomputer via the UART. Upon receiving the data, a warning indication will be displayed for 30 sec, after which a shutdown process starts. The main microcomputer orders a specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 4 times). The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on. If any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, those changes in status will be transmitted to the main microcomputer via the UART. Upon receiving the data, the main microcomputer orders a specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 4 times). The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.

D

FAN_NG2

FAN

Shutdown occurs when the signal is "H." 1 S ∗ 3 times

RST4 = H and FAN_ON2 = H (Monitoring starts 3 sec after the above conditions are established.)

TEMP2

High temperature at MTB

Shutdown occurs if any RST4 = H (Monitoring starts 1 sec after the values equal to or greater than minimum to above conditions are established.) require a shutdown are detected. 1 S ∗ 3 times

E

TMP_NG

High temperature in the drive circuits

Shutdown occurs if any Digital video RST2 = H values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown are detected. 200 mS ∗ 5 times (average)

Low temperature in the drive circuits
F

78
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

5.6.4 TRAP SWITCH

Outline and Notes
For video data transmission inside this Plasma Display, digital signals are used. Therefore, this unit adopts the HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) system for copyright protection. This unit is also provided with a detection switch (TRAP switch) that will prohibit the unit from being turned on again "if the rear case of the unit is accidentally opened," in order to prevent the panel technology from being leaked out. The TRAP switch is disabled while the unit is turned off. When performing internal diagnosis of the PDP, fix the switch to the OFF position using adhesive tape before turning on the unit. After servicing, be sure to remove the adhesive tape.

A

B

TRAP switch

C

POD Assy

MAIN Assy

WHEN THE TRAP SWITCH IS ACTIVATED
When the TRAP switch is activated, the red and blue LEDs will light. In order to deactivate the TRAP switch, close the upper plate of the unit or fix the TRAP switch to the OFF position in the manner described above. Then, follow procedures (1) or (2) below: (1) Deactivating with the remote control unit • Enter Factory mode. • Proceed to the INITIALIZE layer of Factory mode. Hold the DISPLAY key pressed for more than 5 seconds. (2) Deactivating with the RS-232C command • Send the CTM (cancel) command.
D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

79

1

2

3

4

6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE
6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE
A

Operations during Service Factory mode are described here.

6.1.1 SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART
Standby mode POWER [POF]
B

Power supply ON mode FACT [FAY] FACT HOME MENU [FAN]

• The function is changed. • The signal mode is changed.

Effective IR in Factory mode INFORMATION (MTB INFORMATION)

PANEL FACTORY

RS-232C Factory mode [ (MUTING)]

OPTION
C

INITIALIZE Effective 232C command in Factory mode

D

6.1.2 HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE
How to enter Service Factory Mode
By using a PDP service remote control) • PDP service remote control : Press [FACTORY] key. By issuing RS-232C commands ) • During normal Standby mode : Issue [PON] then [FAY]. • During normal operation mode : Issue [FAY].

How to enter Service Factory Mode by Using the supplied Remote Control Unit
• Same as previous model. Please refer to the technical document (Service Know-how).

How to exit Service Factory Mode
E

By using a PDP service remote control) • PDP service remote control : press [FACTORY] key. • Supplied remote control unit : press [HOME MENU] key. By issuing RS-232C commands) • Issue [FAN].

F

80
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE
Fuctions whose setting are set to OFF
The settings for the following functions are set to OFF when Service Factory mode is entered (including when the “FAY” command is received) : Function
2-Screen Operation FREEZE Auto size, Side Mask ORBITER, Mask control Sleep Timer Room light sensor Blue LED dimmer It is not performed during Factory mode. Central value operation (ORBITER) Cancel the operation. Turn off the detecting operation (Setting data will be retained.) Turn off the operation (Setting data will be retained.)
B A

Remarks
Input function set on the main side is selected.

Detection of the TRAP switch The detection operation is stopped. TRAP history Display of TV guide Setting of Parental Control Power Control Image Position To a possible turning on though the memory is maintained. Finish the TV-GUIDE function. When this is turned off, the block of the screen is released. Turn off the operation (However, the setting maintains it.) Central value operation

Note: Enter the factory after cancelling ACI because the ACI operation setting OFF and not done.

C

User data
User data will be treated as follows : • User data on picture-quality and audio-quality adjustments are not reflected, and factory-preset data are output (user data will be retained in memory). When the unit enters Service Factory mode, the current audio-quality adjustment data will be still be retained in memory. • User-setting data will be applied to the various settings (items on the menus), signal formats, and the items that are associated with path change (HDMI settings, etc.). • Data on screen (i.e., screen position; meaning clock dividers, and not including data on screen size). Are reset to the default values (data stored in memory will be retained). Screen size will be retained.

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

81

1

2

3

4

6.1.4 REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE

A

Remote Control Keys
MUTING j (DOWN) i (UP) k (LEFT) l (RIGHT) ENTER/SET INPUT
B

Basic Functions
Switching the main items. Switching the subtitled items. Switching the subtitled items. Decreasing the adjustment value. Increasing the adjustment value. Switching the layers. Selecting INPUT. Selecting INPUT. Increasing the channel number. Decreasing the channel number. Function: TV Power OFF. Factory OFF (Factory mode) Factory ON (Non-Factory mode). Menu ON. Volume UP. Volume DOWN. Drive Mode OFF. INTEGRATOR MENU ON.

Remarks
Shifting to the next main item (top). Shifting downward to the next subtitiled item. Shifting upward to the next upper layer. Decreasing the adjustment value. Increasing the adjustment value. Shifting downward or upward to the next lower or upper layer. Shifting the INPUT to the next function. Switching the INPUT to xx. (xx=1 to 7 etc)

INPUTxx CH+/P+ CH-/PNumeric Keys POWER FACTORY HOME MENU VOLUME+

Function: TV (previously selected channel number is selected) Turning the power off. In Factory mode, turning Factory mode off. In Non-Factory mode, turn Fuctory mode on. In Factory mode, turn Factory mode off. Increasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY) Decreasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY) Turning Drive mode off. Enter INTEGRATOR MODE.

C

VOLUMEDRIVE OFF (Note1) INTEGRATOR

(Note 1) When ten seconds have passed since the [DRIVE OFF] key was pressed at the standby, it becomes invalid. Please press [POWER] key from the [DRIVE OFF] key pressing within ten seconds when you do power supply ON while driven OFF.

D

E

PRO-1150HD PDP service PRO-950HD remote control
F

PDP-5010FD

82
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.1.5 PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL
• The keys labeled with the same names on the service remote control unit have the same functions as those of the supplied remote control unit. (See "2.3 PANEL FACILITIES.") • For the keys not provided on the supplied remote control unit, see the explanations below:

A

GENERATION switch for remote control codes This switch selects the generation of remote control codes to be transmitted: 1: The old-generation codes are transmitted. 2: The new-generation codes are transmitted. With this generation plasma display, set the switch to 2.
B

C

INTEGRATOR Press this key to enter Integrator mode. INPUT Press this key to cyclically change the input source. EXT INPUT Press this key to cyclically change only the external input source. SUB INPUT Not used with this model. DRIVE OFF Press this key to turn off the panel drive. For details on how to cancel this command, see the explanation for the DRV command. AUTO SETUP Use this key for automatic setup, such as the display position setting when an analog PC signal is input. ID NO. SET Not used with this model. FACTORY Press this key to enter Factory mode. 2nd FACTORY Not used with this model. POWER CONTROL Not used with this model. CLEAR Not used with this model. POWER ON Press this key to turn on the unit. This key cannot turn the unit off. POWER OFF Press this key to turn off the unit. This key cannot turn the unit on.
D

E

POINT ZOOM Not used with this model. ZOOM +/Not used with this model.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

83

1

2

3

4

6.1.6 FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE

A

Large Item Middle Item Small Item
6.2.1 INFORMATION 6.2.1.1 VERSION (1) 6.2.1.2 VERSION (2) 6.2.1.3 VERSION (3) 6.2.1.4 MAIN NG 6.2.1.5 TEMPERATURE 6.2.1.6 HOUR METER 6.2.1.7 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 6.2.1.8 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 6.2.1.9 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 6.2.1.10 6.2.1.11 6.2.1.12 6.2.1.13 6.2.1.14 6.2.1.15 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 DTV TUNING STATUS 1 DTV TUNING STATUS 2 DTV TUNING STATUS 3 DTV TV-GUIDE BER DEBUG INFO

Variable / Adjustment Range

Remarks

CLEAR <=>

NO <=> YES

MTB HOUR METER CLEAR NO <=> YES

B

for the technical analysis for the technical analysis

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) 6.2.2.1 PANEL INFORMATION 6.2.2.2 PANEL WORKS 6.2.2.3 POWER DOWN 6.2.2.4 SHUT DOWN 6.2.2.5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+)

C

VOL SUS <=> VOL OFFSET <=> VOL RST P <=> VOL XPOFS1 <=> VOL XPOFS2 <=> VOL YNOFS1 <=> VOL YNOFS3 <=> VOL YNOFS4 <=> RESET1ST_KSB <=> RESET2ND_KSB <=> YSTL_1SF_KSB <=> YSTL_1SF_HZ <=> XSUS_1ST_B <=> YSUS_2ND_B <=> XSUS_3RD_B <=> YSUS_B <=> XSUS_B <=> YSTL_KSB <=> YSTL_HZ <=> YSTL_2SF_KSB <=> YSTL_2SF_HZ <=> YSTL_FMR_KSB <=> YSTL_FMR_HZ <=> SUS FREQ. <=>

000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 112 to 144 MODE 1 to MODE 8 000 to 511 000 to 511 000 to 511 000 to 999 000 to 999 000 to 999 000 to 255 LV-0 to LV-7 LV-0 to LV-7 LV-0 to LV-7 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 PH0 to PH9 OFF <=> MODE1 to MODE8 <=>

Equivalent to VSU (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VOF (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VRP (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VX1 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VX2 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VY1 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VY3 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to VY4 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to R1K (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to R2K (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to Y1K (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to Y1Z (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to X1B (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to Y2B (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to X3B (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to YSB (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to XSB (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to YTK (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to YTZ (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to Y2K (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to Y2Z (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to YNK (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to YNZ (Setting value: 128 fixed) Equivalent to SFR (Setting value: MODE1) Equivalent to PRH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to PGH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to PBH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to PRL (Setting value: 512 fixed) Equivalent to PGL (Setting value: 512 fixed) Equivalent to PBL (Setting value: 512 fixed) Equivalent to ABL (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) Equivalent to RRL (Setting value: Lv-1) Equivalent to RGL (Setting value: Lv-1) Equivalent to RBL (Setting value: Lv-0) Equivalent to AP0S*- (Setting value: PH1) Equivalent to AP0S-* (Setting value: PH0) Equivalent to AP1S*- (Setting value: PH2) Equivalent to AP1S-* (Setting value: PH1) Equivalent to AP2S*- (Setting value: PH1) Equivalent to AP2S-* (Setting value: PH0) Equivalent to AP3S*- (Setting value: PH2) Equivalent to AP3S-* (Setting value: PH1) SKM S00 to S07

D

6.2.2.6 PANEL-2 ADJ (+)

E

6.2.2.7 PANEL FUNCTION (+)

R-HIGH <=> G-HIGH <=> B-HIGH <=> R-LOW <=> G-LOW <=> B-LOW <=> ABL <=> R-LEVEL <=> G-LEVEL <=> B-LEVEL <=> ADDRESS L1 <=> ADDRESS L2 <=> ADDRESS L3 <=> ADDRESS L4 <=> ADDRESS U1 <=> ADDRESS U2 <=> ADDRESS U3 <=> ADDRESS U4 <=> STK MODE <=>

*: Setting value
F

84
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Large Item Middle Item Small Item
6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) 6.2.2.8 ETC. (+) BACKUP DATA <=> DIGITAL EEPROM <=> PD INFO. <=> SD INFO. <=> HR-MTR INFO. <=> PM/B1-B5 <=> P COUNT INFO. <=> MAX TEMP. <=> MASK OFF RST MASK 01 <=> ••• RST MASK 25 <=> MASK OFF PTN MASK 01 <=> ••• PTN MASK 49 <=> MASK OFF CMB MASK 01 <=> ••• CMB MASK 17 <=> NO OPRT <=> TRANSFER or ERR NO OPRT <=> DELETE/REPAIR NO OPRT <=> CLEAR NO OPRT <=> CLEAR NO OPRT <=> CLEAR NO OPRT <=> CLEAR NO OPRT <=> CLEAR NO OPRT <=> CLEAR <=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 75V <=> 60P <=> Equivalent to BCP Equivalent to FAJ/UAJ Equivalent to CPD Equivalent to CSD Equivalent to CHM Equivalent to CPM Equivalent to CPC Equivalent to CMT Equivalent to MKS+S00 Equivalent to MKS+S51 ••• Equivalent to MKS+S75 Equivalent to MKS+S00 Equivalent to MKS+S01 ••• Equivalent to MKS+S49 Equivalent to MKC+S00 Equivalent to MKC+S01 ••• Equivalent to MKC+S17

Variable / Adjustment Range

Remarks

6.2.2.9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+)

B

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 75V <=> 60P <=>

6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+)

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 75V <=> 60P <=>

6.2.3 OPTION 6.2.3.1 EDID WRITE MODE <=> 6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=> 6.2.3.3 AFT <=> 6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+) 6.2.3.5 CC (+) 6.2.4 INITIALIZE 6.2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) 6.2.4.2 FINAL SETUP 6.2.4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 6.2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=> SIDE MASK LEVEL <=> DATA RESET <=> MODE SHIFT <=>

DISABLE <=> ENABLE CABLE <=> AIR DISABLE <=> ENABLE

Exclusively used for production line for the technical analysis for the technical analysis

C

NO <=> YES NO <=> YES DISABLE <=> ENABLE Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted)

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

85

1

2

3

4

6.1.7 INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

A

1

I N F O R MA T I ON V ER S I O N ( 1 )

V D 1 – 3 0 1 0 1 – NT V – AH B

5

I / F MA I N MUL T I

PRS P I C

– – – –

0 0 0 0

7 2 2 2

A K2 K K

0 1A 0 1K 0 1A

Main-items

10

MOD U L E S EQ P R S

– 06A – 0 3W_ A

0 1A 0 1A

Subtitled-items

P AN E L
15

I N FO

XXXXXXXX

B

16

Main-item indications
20 25 30 35 40

V D 1 – 3 0 1 0 1 – NT V – AH B

1

2

3

4 1 Input function
Input Functions
VIDEO 1 to 7

OSD
VD 1 to 7 ARA ARB CBA CBB HG HMG PC

C

Terrestrial Wave A Terrestrial Wave B Cable A Cable B Home Gallery (Regular model only) Home Media Gallery (ELITE model only) PC

2 SIG mode and Screen size
D

Note: See SIG-Mode Tables. (See next page.)

3 Color system and Signal type
Color System and Signal Type
NTSC Composite input S-connector input Y/CB/CR Y/PB/PR RGB
E

OSD
NTV NTS CBR PBR RGB DIG

Digital Video signal

4 Option (Destination, Panel Generation, etc.)
Options
Regular model ELITE model

OSD
ATB AHB

F

86
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

2 SIG Mode and Screen size (by User is displayed)
1st and 2nd characters : Resolution of the input signal 3rd and 4th characters : Refresh rate of the input signal 5th character : Selection of the screen size g Input signal mode table for video signals (resolutions and V frequencies) 1st to 4th Character
10 20 30 40 50 50 60 60 60 60 24 60
A

Signal Type
SDTV*525i SDTV*525p HDTV*1125i HDTV*750p HDTV*1125p HDTV*1125p

Fv (Hz)
60.000 60.000 60.000 60.000 24.000 60.000

Fh (kHz)
15.750 31.500 33.750 45.000 27.000 67.500
B

Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Horizontal Frequency

g Input signal mode table for PC signals (resolutions and V frequencies) 1st to 4th Character
C1 C2 C4 C6 C7 C9 D6 70 60 60 60 60 60 60

Signal Type
720 x 400 640 x 480 800 x 600 1280 x 720 1024 x 768 1360 x 768 1280 x 1024

Fv (Hz)
70.087 59.940 60.317 60.000 60.004 60.015 60.000

Fh (kHz)
31.469 31.469 37.879 44.800 48.363 47.712 64.000
C

Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Horizontal Frequency

g Current selection of the screen size 5th Character
0 1 2 3 4 5

GUI Notation
DOT BY DOT 4:3 FULL ZOOM CINEMA WIDE

VIDEO
k (∗) k k k k k

PC
− k k − − −

Remarks

D

k: supported, −: unsupported Note (∗): It is effective only with models having the Full HD panel.

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

87

1

2

3

4

6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU
6.2.1 INFORMATION
A

Operation items
No.
6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.4 6.2.1.5 6.2.1.6

Function/Display
VERSION (1) VERSION (2) VERSION (3) MAIN NG TEMPERATURE HOUR METER HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 DTV TUNING STATUS 1 DTV TUNING STATUS 2 DTV TUNING STATUS 3 DTV TV-GUIDE BER DEBUG INFO TV-Guide Bit Error Rate information Debug information

Context
The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. (Common part) The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. (Individual part) The Shutdown Message ID/Event Times in Main Microcomputer are displayed. The Temperature/FAN rotating status in Main Microcomputer are displayed. The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information are displayed. The Information of HDMI information files are displayed.

RS-232C Command
QS1 QSE QNG QMT QS3 –

B

6.2.1.7 6.2.1.8 6.2.1.9 6.2.1.10 6.2.1.11 6.2.1.12 6.2.1.13 6.2.1.14 6.2.1.15

Display the Signal Information on VDEC.

Digital broadcast information and status is displayed upon receiving digital broadcast signal.

– –

C

6.2.1.1 VERSION (1)
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON V ER S I O N ( 1 )

V D 1 – 3 0 1 0 1 – NT V – AH B

D

5

I / F MA I N MUL T I

PRS P I C

– – – –

0 0 0 0

7 2 2 2

A K2 K K

0 1A 0 1K 0 1A

10

MOD U L E S EQ P R S

– 06A – 0 3W_ A

0 1A 0 1A

P AN E L
15 16

I N FO

XXXXXXXX

E

Microcomputer
I/F microcomputer Main microcomputer Multi processor Multi processor Module microcomputer Sequence processor

Item Name
I/F MAIN MULTI PRS MULTI PIC MODULE SEQ PRS

Display Example (Execution program block)
-07A -02K2 -02K -02K -06A -03W_A

Display Example (Boot block)
01A 01K 01A 01A 01A

Note: In the 29-32 rows, the Boot version information on each device is displayed. In the 19-24 rows, the version of the execution program is displayed.
F

• PANEL INFO: It displays the generation of the panel, inchage and the type of the panel. For details on display values and settings, see "10: Panel Information" in "9.3.1. QS1 (PANEL STATUS)."

88
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.2.1.2 VERSION (2)
A
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON V ER S I O N ( 2 )

CBA – 3 0 6 01 – D I G– AHB

5

10

DTV H AR DWA R E S ER I A L R UN T I ME CFE K ERN E L R OO T S F LAGS

XXXXXXXX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 XXXXXXXX HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH H /W ( Y ) DVR ( Y ) DFAST ( Y )

FON T S ( Y ) P L OG ( Y )

B

15 16

Meaning
DTV Hardware Version DTV Hardware Serial DTV Runtime Version CFE Version KERNEL Version ROOTS Version FLAGS

Item Name
HARDWARE SERIAL RUNTIME CFE KERNEL ROOTS FLAGS

Display Example
XXXXXXXX 01234567 HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH H/W (Y) DVR (Y) FONTS(Y) DFAST(Y) PLOG (Y)

C

6.2.1.3 VERSION (3)
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON V ER S I O N ( 3 )

CBA – 3 0 6 01 – D I G– AHB

D

5

HMG / HG P A S S WO R D

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4

10

15 16

E

Meaning
HMG/HG module Version User Password

Item Name
HMG/HG PASSWORD

Display Example
01234567 1234

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

89

1

2

3

4

6.2.1.4 MAIN NG
A
1

1

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

I N F O R MA T I ON MA I N N G MA I N

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

S UB I C I C L 2 F A I – – E V F – – 1 – SW – – – – – – – –

0 0 15 1H2 1M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 1 3 2 1 0 H5 H0 H5 H5 H0 0M 3M 2M 8M 7M

5

10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MA– I MA– I MA – 3 MA I N TEMP

15

B

16

MTB side's Shutdown NG information
OSD: MAIN
AUDIO MODULE MA-3L IF MULTI MA-IIC
C

OSD: SUB
-------

Cause of Shutdown
Short-circuit of the speaker terminal or failure of audio amplifier. Failure of communication to Module microcomputer. 3-wire Serial Communication of Main microcomputer. Communication failure of IF microcomputer Multi Processor communication failure IIC Communication failure of Main microcomputer

FE1 FE2 MSPMAP AV-SW RGB-SW VDEC SDRAM ADC HDMI US-MSP

Analog Tuner 1 Analog Tuner 2 MSP/MAP AV Switch RGB Switch VDEC VDEC - SDRAM AD/PLL HDMI MSP Communication failure of Main microcomputer

D

MAIN FAN FAN1 FAN2 TEMP2 DTUNER PS/RST RETRY DE-BCM DE-FE DE-CAS

Fan stopped Fan stopped (Only with models having the Full HD panel) Abnormally high temperature at MTB. Failure of Digital Tuner Failure to DTV Starting DTV communication error Abnormally in BCM7038 Tuner 1 or 2 Card I/F IC VBI Slicer EEPROM TV-Guide Error Failure at Home Gallery Middleware Application Abnormally in RST2 of MAIN Assy. (power decrease of DC-DC converter) Abnormally in RST4 of MAIN Assy. (power decrease of Relay power) Failure at Home Media Gallery

E

DE-VBI DE-EPI TV-G HOME-G DTVMID DTVAPP RST-MA M-DCDC RELAY HMG

F

HMG MA-EEP

Home Media Gallery startup error IIC communication line between EEPROM and MAIN.

90
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

A

I N F O R MA T I ON MA I N NG

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

5

10

8
15 16

CL EAR

< =>

: NO

B

Operation:
Even if [k] key or [l] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} ⇔ {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated. If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, clear process will begin.

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

91

1

2

3

4

6.2.1.5 TEMPERATURE
A

A present temperature and the FAN rotation are displayed. If either [k] key or [l] key is pressed, the display data is refreshed.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON T E M P E R A T UR E

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

5

T E MP 1 T E MP 2 FAN1

: : : :

10 4 . 3 ( F ) 10 4 . 3 ( F ) L OW –– – 10 23 ( A / D ) 1 3 0 ( A / D )

B

10

FAN2

B– SENSOR :
15 16

• Display/Meaning
TEMP1 : The temperature of the sensor on the panel side is displayed by the Fahrenheit (F). TEMP2 : The temperature conversion display is done with 10 bit the A/D input value of IF uCOM 90 pin (AN4). It is displayed by both the Fahrenheit (F) and 8 bit A/D value. (Remark:When temperature (F) of the sensor becomes more than a specified temperature, the shutdown start of processing.) FAN1 : The value of the FAN rotating state is displayed. STOP: stopped, LOW: slow speed, HIGH: high speed. FAN2 : The value of the rotation state of FAN is displayed. During a rotation of FAN, 8bit D/A value output from 2 pin (DA0) of IF uCOM is displayed. It is displayed with OFF during a stop (only for the FHD model). B-SENSOR : The value that indicated the degree of brightness input into an Room light sensor is displayed. AD value when the output of the Room light sensor was input into 89 pin (AN5) of IF uCOM is displayed.

C

D

E

F

92
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.2.1.6 HOUR METER
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

A

I N F O R MA T I ON H OU R M E T ER

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

5

PA NE L MT B

0 0 15 1H 0 0 15 1H

2 1M 2 1M

PAN E L
10

CO U N T / S E R I A L 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 5 T I ME S __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

P - C OUN T SER I AL

15 16

B

• Display/Meaning
Meaning
HOUR METER (PANEL) HOUR METER (MTB) POWER ON COUNTER SYSTEM SERIAL

Item Name
PANEL MTB P-COUNT SERIAL

Display Example
00151H 21M 00151H 21M 00000095 TIMES

Corresponding RS-232C Command
QS3 QS3 QS3 QS3
C

Note: The PANEL-side's HOUR METER/P-COUNT acquires information from the PANEL-side.

• MTB HOUR METER
In HOUR METER screen on Factory Menu, press the [ENTER] key, and then it moves to the screnn to clear MTB HOUR METER. (MTB HOUR METER is cleared only.)
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON MTB HO U R ME T ER

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

D
5

10

8
15 16

CL EAR

< =>

: NO

Operation:
Even if [k] key or [l] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} ⇔ {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated. If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, clear process will begin. MTB HOUR METER is cleared only. PANEL HOUR METER is not cleared.

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

93

1

2

3

4

6.2.1.7 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1
A
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON H DM I S I G NA L : : : : : : AC AC AC AC AC AC T T T T T T

V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B I NFO I I I I I I V V V V V V E E E E E E 1 MOD E : H DM I B I ST : –– : 0 0 06 1 4 NVA L C TSVAL : 0 0 7 4 2 5 AKSV : B7 0 3 6 1 F BKSV : 5 1 1 E F2 1 I T CN T : N O EX T CO L : x v Y CC 7 RGB QR : D E F AU L P I XDEP : 1 2 b i t

5

10

PWR 5 V V S Y NC CKD T SCD T DCR P T AU T H

4 0 71 4 AC D 0 9 T

B
15 16

Displays the input signal information of HDMI terminal Item
PWR5V VSYNC CKDT SCDT DCRPT AUTHEN MODE BIST NVAL CTSVAL AKSV BKSV IT CNT EXTCOL RGV QR PIXDEP

Meaning
+5 V power detection (18 pin of HDMI terminal) VSYNC detection Clock detection SYNC detection HDCP decryption status HDCP authentication status HDMI mode status ---N value CTS value Shadow AKSV value Shadow BKSV value IT content (AVI info) Extension calorimetry (AVI info) RGB range (AVI info) Number of pixel/bit

C

D

E

F

94
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.2.1.8 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2
A
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON H DM I S I G NA L : : : : : : : :

V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B I NFO 2 CO L S CO LME AS PEC AC T I V S a me V FMT 19 20x P I X R SO URC DVR - D P T T E a 1 P E T : : : : s : 0 : : 9 42 2 70 9 16 : 9 p i c t 8 0 i @6 0 0 0 P I ONE E R 0

5

10

H RES V RES H DE V DE I NTRL V PO L H PO L AUD I O

22 00 05 63 19 20 05 40 I NT PO S PO S 48 k PCM 20 b i t

B

15 16

Displays input signal status of HDMI terminal Display Item
H RES V RES H DE V DE INTRL V POL H POL AUDIO (first line) AUDIO (second line) AUDIO (third line) COL SP COLMET ASPECT ACTIVE V FMT PIX RP SOURCE (first line) SOURCE (second line)

Meaning
Number of horizontal pixels (decimal) Number of vertical lines (decimal) Number of effectively horizontal pixels (decimal) Number of effectively vertical lines (decimal) Interlace (=INT) or progressive (=PRG) VSYNC polarity HSYNC polarity Sampling frequency. (ex. DVD: 48kHz, CD: 44.1kHz) *1 PCM (PCM) or No PCM (=no PCM) Quantization bit Color space (AVI Info) (422 or 444 or RGB) *2 N/A Aspect (AVI Info) Video active format (AVI Info) Video identification code (AVI Info) N/A Vendor name of the emission device Model name of the emission device
C

D

*1: Confirm if this item is displayed when the audio is not outputted. *2: If may not match to the state of source devices when the color is abnormal.

Display of HDMI FACTORY and correspondence of resolution
Please confirm the following 5 items when the picture doesn't come out. Input Signal 480i (525i) @ 60 480p (525p) @ 60 1080i (1125i) @ 60 720p (750p) @ 60 1080p (1125p) @ 60 1080p (1125p) @ 24 H RES 858 858 2200 1650 2200 2750 V RES 262 or 263 525 562 or 563 750 1125 1125 FACTORY Display H DE V DE 720 240 720 480 1920 540 1280 720 1920 1920 1080 1080 V FMT 720x480i @ 60 720x480p @60 1920x1080i @ 60 1280x720p @ 60 1920x1080p @ 60 1920x1080p @ 24

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

95

1

2

3

4

6.2.1.9 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1
A
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON V DE C S I G NA L – – – – – – – – – 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 9 9 9 9 B B B 0 1 4 5 6 8 5 6 7

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B I NFO : : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 S V DE C – – – – – – – – – 4 4 4 4 4 – 5 5 5 0 0 9 9 9 – B B B 0 1 4 5 6 – 5 6 7 : : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 0 0 0

5

MV DE C

10

B

15 16

Displays signal status that is input to VDEC.
Device Sub Address (Main screen)
000h 001h 094h 095h 096h 098h 1B5h 1B6h 1B7h

Sub Address (Sub screen)
400h 401h 494h 495h 496h --5B5h 5B6h 5B7h

Meaning
Line system distinction result VTR distinction result Slot number Color system distinction result ACC coefficient 3D YC flag MV detection 1 MV detection 2 MV detection 3

VDEC
C

6.2.1.10 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON V DE C S I G NA L – – – – – 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 5 8 B C D

CBA – 3 0 6 0 1 – D I G– AHB I NFO : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 S V DE C – – – – – 6 6 6 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 5 8 B C D : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D
5

MV DE C

10

15 16

E

Displays signal status that is input to VDEC.
Device Sub Address (Main screen)
205h 208h 20Bh 20Ch 20Dh

Sub Address (Sub screen)
605h 608h 60Bh 60Ch 60Dh CC detection 1 CC detection 2 CC-CRI detection XDS content advisor 0 XDS content advisor 1

Meaning

VDEC

F

96
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.2.1.11 DTV TUNING STATUS 1
Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

A

I N F O R MA T I ON DTV T U N I NG

CBA – 3 0 6 0 1 – D I G– AHB ST ATUS 1 : : : : : : : 6 7 5MH z QAM 2 5 6 LO CK 85% 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 45 se c
B

5

I N BA N D F R E QU E NC Y MO DU L A T I O N ST AT US AG C C O RR E C T E D E R R OR U N CO R R E C T E D E R R OR T I ME

10

15 16

6.2.1.12 DTV TUNING STATUS 2
Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N F O R MA T I ON DTV T U N I NG

CBA – 3 0 6 0 1 – D I G– AHB ST ATUS : : : : : 2 3 2 2 2 1
C

5

P R OG R A M N U MB E R V I DE O P I D AUD I O P I D PCR P I D V I D E O F O RM A T

0 0 0 0

1 2 1 8 0 I / 1 6 : 9

10

15 16

6.2.1.13 DTV TUNING STATUS 3
Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

D

I N F O R MA T I ON DTV T U N I NG

CBA – 3 0 6 0 1 – D I G– AHB ST ATUS 3 : : : : : : 7 0MH z UN LO CK 72% 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 45 se c
E

5

OO B F R EQU E N C Y ST AT US AG C C O RR E C T E D E R R OR U N CO R R E C T E D E R R O R T I ME

10

15 16

6.2.1.14 DTV TV-GUIDE BER
Exclusively used for production line. TV-Guide error bit ratio information is displayed.

6.2.1.15 DEBUG INFO
Exclusively used for technical analysis. Debug information for development use is displayed.
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

97

1

2

3

4

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+)

A

Operation Items
This is the menu screen for the adjustment of the panel. Data acquisition and value adjustment can be performed for the following items: No.
6.2.2.1

Indication
PANEL INFORMATION

Description of functions
Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and statuses of memories for adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are displayed. Operation data, such as accumulated pulse-meter count, accumulated hour-meter count, accumulated power-on count, and the temperature detected by the sensor, are displayed. The power-down history is displayed, with the hour-meter values that indicate the hour values when power-downs occurred. The shutdown history is displayed, with the hour-meter values that indicate the hour values when shutdowns occurred. Settings of the driving pulse timing and driving voltage can be performed. White balance and ABL (power consumption) for the panel can be set. Perform panel-degradation correction-level setting, phase adjustment of the address, and the streaking-correction setting. Copying of backup data and clearance of various data can be performed. The mask indication (RASTER) can be set and indicated. The mask indication (PATTERN) can be set and indicated. The mask indication (COMBI) can be set and indicated.

6.2.2.2

PANEL WORKS

B

6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.2.2.6 6.2.2.7 6.2.2.8 6.2.2.9

POWER DOWN SHUT DOWN PANEL-1 ADJ (+) PANEL-2 ADJ (+) PANEL FUNCTION (+) ETC. (+) RASTER MASK SETUP (+)

C

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) 6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+)

D

E

F

98
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Details of indications in each layer
• In the following examples, GUI images for a 50-inch and 60-inch models are indicated.

A

6.2.2.1 PANEL INFORMATION
• Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and statuses of memories for adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD 1 – 1 0 6 0 5 – NT V – A T B T I ON 2F 2F 2F 4Y 4 3Y 0Y

5

10

15 16

I N FO R MA 1 P AN E L 2 =0 MO DU L E 3 – P RG =0 4 =0 – DAT 5 SEQ– PRS =0 6 – PRQ =0 7 – P I C =0 8 – SEQ 62 9 __ A SER I AL B D I G . EEP AD C BA CK U P AD D E

g Key operation
0 5F

B

0 4F

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS <UP> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP (+) <L/R> : Updating displayed information

_ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ JUSTED JUSTED

C

Display items:
MODULE -PRG -DAT SEQ-PRG -PRG -PIC -SEQ SERIAL DIG.EEP BACKUP : The version of data written in the Module microcomputer (IC3601) is indicated. : The program version of the Module microcomputer is indicated. : The data version of the Module microcomputer is indicated. : The version of data written in the Sequence LSI (IC3301) is indicated. : The program version of the Sequence LSI is indicated. : The Picture-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated. : The sequence-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated. : The serial number of the module is indicated. : The adjusted status of the EEPROM that is mounted on the DIGITAL Assy is indicated. : The adjusted status of the EEPROM for backup that is mounted on the SENSOR Assy is indicated.
D

6.2.2.2 PANEL WORKS
• Data on operations, such as the accumulated pulse-meter counts, hour-meter count, power-on count, and temperature detected by the sensor, are sent back. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD 1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –N TV – AT B

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to POWER DOWN <UP> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION <L/R> : Updating displayed information
E

5

10

15 16

1 P A N E L WO R K S 2 3 PM– B 1 0 0 0 0 10 5 4 PM– B 2 0 0 0 0 10 6 5 PM– B 3 0 0 0 0 11 8 6 0 0 0 0 06 8 PM– B 4 7 0 0 0 0 09 2 PM– B 5 8 9 HR–MTR 0 0 0 0 28H A P –COUN T 0 0 0 0 00 8 B T EM P 1 + 33 . 8 / C D E

7M 2M 5M 8M 6M 0 2M T I ME S + 75 . 1

2

Temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".

Contents of the Display item
• PM-B1 to B5: The accumulated pulse-meter counts for the 5 blocks on the screen are indicated. (the lowest-order digit represents millions of pulses.) • HR-MTR: The hour-meter value (accumulated power-on hours) is indicated. • P-COUNT: The accumulated power-on count is indicated. • TEMP1: The current panel temperature and the historical maximum temperature recorded in memory are indicated. The range of temperature indication is from -50.0 to +99.9. (The temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".)
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

99

1

2

3

4

A

6.2.2.3 POWER DOWN
• The power-down history is displayed. The last most 8 power-down histories are displayed with the hour-meter values that indicate the hours when power-downs occurred. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L
1 P OW E 2 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 9 6 A 7 B 8 C D E

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 05 – NTV– ATB

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to SHUT DOWN <UP> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS <L/R> : Updating displayed information

R D OW N 1ST X – DRV Y – SUS SCAN P OW E R ADRS SCAN5 V Y – DCDC – S – S – X –

2 ND – – – –– CAN – – – –– CAN – – – –– – DCDC – – – ––

0 0 0 3 2 8H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 4 4 4 1 1 0 7H 1H 1H 1H 3H 2H 0H H

0 4M 1 4 3 2 4 1 5 6M 4M 2M 9M 2M 1M 1M M

5

B

10

15 16

<Causes of power-down and corresponding OSD indications> Cause of power-down
POWER SUPPLY Unit SCAN Assy
C

OSD Indication
P-PWR SCAN SCAN5V Y-DRV Y-DCDC Y-SUS

Cause of power-down
ADDRESS Assy X DRIVE Assy DC/DC converter for X drive X-drive SUS circuit Digital DC/DC converter Unknown

OSD Indication
ADRS XDRV X-DCDC X-SUS D-DCDC UNKNOWN

5 V power for SCAN Assy Y DRIVE Assy DC/DC converter for Y drive Y-drive SUS circuit

* When power-down is confirmed, the factor is displayed as "1st", "2nd", according to the accuracy order. * The power-down history is not recorded when the power-down occurred at the same place and same time.

6.2.2.4 SHUT DOWN
• The shutdown history is displayed. The last most 8 shutdown histories are displayed with the hour-meter values that indicate the hours when shutdowns occurred. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.
D
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 05 – NTV–ATB

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+) <UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN <L/R> : Updating displayed information

5

10

1 S HU T D OW N 2 MA I N 3 4 T MP – NG 1 5 2 SQ– L S I 6 3 MD – I I C 7 4 SQ– L S I 8 5 MD – I I C 9 6 SQ– L S I A 7 B 8 C D E

SUB T EMP – H BUSY DAC1 VER– HS BACKUP BUSY

0 0 0 3 2 8H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 7 4 4 4 1 1 7H 1H 1H 1H 3H 2H H H

0 4M 1 4 3 2 4 1 6M 4M 2M 9M 2M 1M M M

15 16

E

* When there is detail information when shutdown occurred, the possible defective part is displayed as Sub information. <Cause of shut-down and corresponding OSD Indication > Cause of shut-down (MAIN) Cause of shut-down (SUB) OSD Indication OSD Indication Item Item
Drive Processing IC SQ_LSI Communication Error Drive Stop Communication Busy Version mismatching (H/S) (M/S) MAIN EEPROM Communication Error BACKUP EEPROM Communication Error DAC1 Communication Error DAC2 Communication Error − High temperature of the panel Low temperature of the panel RTRY SQ-NON BUSY VER-HS, VER-MS EEPROM BACKUP DAC1 DAC2 − TEMP-H TEMP-L
4

MDU-IIC
F

MD-IIC

Abnormally in RST2 power supply Panel temperature

RST2 TMP-NG

100
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3

5

6

7

8

A

6.2.2.5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+)
• Timing and voltage for the driving pulse are set. At third line of the screen, the WB (White Balance) table and frequency table indicating operation status are displayed, and at fifteenth line of the screen, the item for the upper nested layer (PANEL-1 ADJ [+]) is displayed. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D P AN E L – 1 E 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV–ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+) <UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
B

5

10

15 16

ADJ

( + )

• When the screen is shifted to the next nested layer below, the item of the layer above is indicated at third line of the screen, and the item of the layer below is indicated at fifteenth line. • The configuration of the menu screen is the same for any adjustment item that has lower layers. • To confirm that the change in the SUS FREQ. setting has resulted in diminishing of AM radio interference in this layer, after changing the setting, turn the unit off then back on.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

C

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV–ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item <UP> : Shifting to the previous item <RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value <LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value <VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/ setting value <VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the adjustment/setting value <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

5

10

15 16

1 P AN E L – 1 A D J 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D VOL O F F S E T < => E

D

: 13 4

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

101

1

2

3

4

A

6.2.2.6 PANEL-2 ADJ (+)
• White balance can be adjusted by adjusting R, G, and B gain. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+) <UP> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+) <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

5

B
10

15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D P AN E L – 2 E

ADJ

( + )

C
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

g Key operation
P AN E L FAC T . VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

5

10

D
15 16

1 P AN E L – 2 A D J 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D R –H I GH < = > E

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item <UP> : Shifting to the previous item <RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value <LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value <VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/ setting value <VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the adjustment/setting value <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

: 25 4

The ABL/WB adjustment values are grouped into up to four tables, depending on the drive sequences. The adjustment value for the actually driven table is displayed. The number of the adjustment table and the drive sequence currently selected are displayed on the right side of the third line as the On-Screen display.

Drive sequence and adjustment table
Sequence Name Adjustment Value Table Video50 Video60 Video72 Video75 TBL2 TBL1 TBL1 TBL3 PC60 TBL4

E

F

102
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.2.2.7 PANEL FUNCTION (+)
• A setting for panel degradation correction can be made. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D P AN E L E 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

A

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to ETC.(+) <UP> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+) <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
B

5

10

15 16

F UNC T I ON

( + )

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item <UP> : Shifting to the previous item <RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value <LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

C

5

10

15 16

F UNC T I ON 1 P AN E L 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D R–L EVEL < => E

: LV - 3
D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

103

1

2

3

4

A

6.2.2.8 ETC. (+)
• The setting about the backup of panel adjusting value and various data on panel operational information can be cleared. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E TC E 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP (+) <UP> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+) <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

5

B
10

15 16

( + )

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

32

P AN E L
1 E TC . 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D B AC K U P E

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item <UP> : Shifting to the previous item <RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value <LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

C
5

10

15 16

DATA

< =>

: NO

OPRT

D

E

F

104
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

6.2.2.9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+)
• This menu set the RASTER MASK and the drive sequence at RASTER MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D RAS T ER E

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) <UP> : Shifting to ETC. (+) <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
B

5

10

15 16

MA S K

SETUP

( + )

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB SETUP [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> <UP> <RIGHT> <LEFT> <SET> : Shifting to the next MASK : Shifting to the previous MASK : Changing MASK sequence (+) : Changing MASK sequence (-) : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer
C

5

10

15 16

1 RAS T E R MA S K 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D R S T MA SK 01 E

: 60V

• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75V and 60P using the Right or Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off.

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

105

1

2

3

4

A

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)
• This menu set the PATTERN MASK and the drive sequence at PATTERN MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP (+) <UP> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP (+) <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

5

B
10

15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D PAT T ERN E

MA S K

SETUP

( + )

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB SETUP [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> <UP> <RIGHT> <LEFT> <SET> : Shifting to the next MASK : Shifting to the previous MASK : Changing MASK sequence (+) : Changing MASK sequence (-) : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

C

5

10

15 16

1 PA T T E RN MA S K 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D P TN MA SK 01 E

: 60V

D

• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75V and 60P using the Right or Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off.

E

F

106
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+)
• This menu set the COMBI MASK and the drive sequence at COMBI MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

P AN E L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D C OM B I E

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION <UP> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
B

5

10

15 16

MA S K

SETUP

( + )

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

32

P AN E L

FAC T .

VD1 – 1 0 6 0 5 –NTV– ATB [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

g Key operation
<DOWN> <UP> <RIGHT> <LEFT> <SET> : Shifting to the next MASK : Shifting to the previous MASK : Changing MASK sequence (+) : Changing MASK sequence (-) : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer
C

5

10

15 16

MA S K S E T U P 1 COMB I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D C MB M A S K 01 E

: 60V

• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75V and 60P using the Right or Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off.

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

107

1

2

3

4

6.2.3 OPTION
Operation item
A

No.

Function
CABLE <=> AIR

Content
DISABLE <=> ENABLE

RS-232C
−−− −−− −−− −−− −−−

6.2.3.1 EDID WRITE MODE <=> 6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=> 6.2.3.3 AFT <=> 6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+) 6.2.3.5 CC (+)

OFF <=> ON (Controls AFT action) Exclusively used for technical analysis Exclusively used for technical analysis

6.2.3.1 EDID WRITE MODE <=>
B

Exclusively used for production line.

6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=>
Exclusively used for production line.

6.2.3.3 AFT <=>
Exclusively used for production line.
C

6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+)
Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted).

6.2.3.5 CC (+)
Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted).

D

E

F

108
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6.2.4 INITIALIZE
Operation item No. Function Content
Configure the color of the side mask. Initialize flash memorys on virgin product status Enter HMG/HG SERVICE MODE Exclusively used for technical analsyis.

RS-232C
SML FST −−− −−−

A

6.2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) 6.2.4.2 FINAL SETUP (+) 6.2.4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 6.2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=>

Note: When there is an altered history due to an open TRAP SW, if the "DISPLAY" key is held for at least 5 seconds on the above menu, the altered history will be cleared and the unit will be back to normal.

6.2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+)
B
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N I T I AL I Z E I N

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

5

10

C
15 16

S I DE

MAS K

L E VE L

( + )

To configure sidemask level (To adjust the values, input signal is required). Display Content RS-232C
SML

SIDE MASK LEVEL <=> Adjust Side Mask level (Adjustable range: 000 to 255)

6.2.4.2 FINAL SETUP (+)
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

D

I N I T I AL I Z E F I NAL SETUP

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B

5

10

E

15 16

DATA

RES ET

< =>

: NO

• To reset each memory values to factory default values. Factory command is "FST". • When the configuration is set to <NO> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed, no action is taken and the menu returns to previous screen. • When the configuration is set to <YES> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed for 5 seconds, the reset action executes.

Be sure to disconnect and connect the AC cable after FINAL SETUP. When replacing the MAIN Assy, the FINAL SETUP is required.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

109

1

2

3

4

6.2.4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE
A
1 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

I N I T I AL I Z E HMG / H G S E RV I C E

V D 1 – 3 0 6 0 1 – PBR– AHB MO D E

5

10

B

15 16

MOD E

SH I FT

< =>

:YES

The value of all memorized data are set to shipment status. If the [ENTER] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, HMG/HG SERVICE mode will be done. For ELITE model Be sure to do above procedure at input fuction except HMG. For details, refer to the service manual for the ELITE model.

C

HG (Home Gallery) SERVICE MODE (Regular model)
1. Home Gallery Screen (1) When the USB device is connected

D

(2) When the USB device is not connected

E

F

110
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

(3) Each item explanation (Example)
A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b

1 PTP Support Disable PTP Non-Support Enable PTP Support 2 T (Topology info) Bus Bus Number Lev Level in topology for this bus Prnt Parent Device Number Port Connector/Port on Parent for this device
Cnt Dev# Spd MxCh Count of devices at this level Device Number Device Speed in Mbps Max Children

String String
Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal

8 C (Configuration descriptor info) #Ifs Number of Interfaces #Cfg Configuration Number Atr Attributes MxPwr MaxPower in mA 9 I (Interface descriptor info)
If# Alt #Eps Cls Sub Prot Driver Interface Number Alternate Setting Number Number of Endpoints Interface Class Interface Sub Class Interface Protocol Driver name

Decimal Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal

B

Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal

Decimal Decimal Decimal Hexadecimal(String) Hexadecimal Hexadecimal String
C

3 D (Device descriptor info) Ver Device USB version Cls Device Class Sub Device Sub Class Prot Device Protocol MxPS Max Packet Size of Default Endpoint #Cfgs Number Configurations 4 P (Product ID info) Vendor Vendor ID code ProdID Product ID code Rev Product revision number 5 S (String descriptor info - 1) Manufacturer 6 S (String descriptor info - 2) Product 7 S (String descriptor info - 3) SerialNumber

a E (Endpoint descriptor info)
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Decimal Decimal

b E (Endpoint descriptor info) Ad Endpoint Address (I=In, O=Out) Atr Attributes MxPS Endpoint Max Packet Size Ivl Interval (max) between transfers

Hexadecimal(String) Hexadecimal(String) Decimal Decimal

Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal

String
D

String

String

2. End method
It is the same as the case that Home Gallery displays.

E

6.2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=>
Exclusively used for technical analsyis (details omitted).

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

111

1

2

3

4

7. DISASSEMBLY
7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER FOR THE MAIN PARTS AND BOARDS
A

Note: Even if the unit shown in the photos and illustrations in this manual may differ from your product, the procedures described here are common.

Flowchart of removal order for the main parts and boards
It is efficient to proceed with removal of the main parts and boards in the order shown in the chart below:

1
B

1 Power Button Case (508F) Side input cover

1 Function button panel

1 Rear case (508F)

SIDE KEY

C

FHD FAN CONNECT

FHD POWER SW

Fan Holder (Upper central part)

POWER SUPPLY

2 Side input panel (8U)

2 Side input shield

2 Function button shield

2 POD stay A

D

SIDE IO

50F X DRIVE 4

50F Y DRIVE

POD

MAIN

Front case Assy (508FU)

3 Terminal panel B (50U)
E

50FHD LED

FHD RLS

FHD IR

5 Multi base Section Terminal panel A (U)

6 Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy, Front Chassis HB Assy (50), Panel holder V1 (50), V2 (50), Front chassis VL (508F)

50F DIGITAL

PANEL SENSOR

TANSHI 50F SCAN A 50F SCAN B 50F SCAN C 50F SCAN D

F

112
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

7.2 DISASSEMBLY
A

Disassembly Speaker System 1 2 3 4
Disconnect the speaker cables. Remove the three screws. Remove the speaker system. Remove the three brackets by removing the six screws.
B

When using the hung on wall unit

Speaker cable

1

C

4
When using the Pioneer table top stand

×2

3 2
Speaker system

Bracket

4

×2

Bracket

D

2 4
Speaker cable
×2

1

Bracket

2

4 2

×2

3
Bracket

E

Speaker system

4 2

×2

Bracket

Bracket

4

×2

2

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

113

1

2

3

4

A

Disassembly
1 Rear Case (508F)
Function button panel
SIDE KEY Assy

1 2 3 4

Remove the two screws. Remove the function button panel.

Side input cover
B

Remove the two screws. Remove the side input cover. Function button panel Side input cover

1
Power button case (508F)

1 2

3 4

3

5 6

Remove the two screws. Remove the power button case.

Power button case (508F)

5
C

5 6

Rear case (508F)

Rear case (508F)

D

1 2 3 4 5

Remove the 20 screws. (AMZ30P060FTB) Remove the 10 screws. (TBZ40P080FTB) Remove the two screws. (ABA1332) Remove the one screw. (ABA1341) Remove the rear case (508F).

2 2

1

1

1

2 2

1 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 4
-4 -1

1 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 1
-1

1 1 1 1

5 4 1

1

2 2

1 3
-2 -2

E

Tightening sequence for the screws when assembling
When assembling the rear case (508F), tighten the screws in the following sequence:

2

2 1

4
-4

1 2 3 4 5
F

Tighten the two screws. Tighten three screws. Tighten the two screws. Tighten the eight screws. Tighten other screws.

4
-3

4
-3

4
-2

4
-2

4
-1

4
-1

114
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

2 Access to PCB Assys
SIDE IO Assy
• For 50F X DRIVE Assy Side input shield • For SIDE IO Assy SIDE IO Assy

A

1 2 3 4

Remove the four screws. Remove the two screws. Remove the four screws. Remove the side input panel (8U).

2 1

1

50F X DRIVE Assy

1 2 3 1 2 3

Remove the two screws. Remove the side input shield with PCB. Diagnose the 50F X DRIVE Assy. • For 50F Y DRIVE Assy Function button shield SIDE KEY Assy Side input panel (8U)

B

50F Y DRIVE Assy
Remove the two screws. Remove the function button shield with PCB. Diagnose the 50F Y DRIVE Assy.

1

2

1 1 1 2 3
×4

1 1 4 2

Caution: As the two capacitors on the 50F Y DRIVE Assy are located very close to sub frame L Assy 507, if the former Assy is tilted toward the latter Assy when disassembling, they may come into contact with the latter Assy. Therefore, before removing the 50F Y DRIVE Assy, be sure to tilt the capacitors, as shown in the photo (away from sub frame L Assy 507). Sub frame L Assy 507

FHD FAN CONNECT Assy

C

FHD POWER SW Assy Capacitor 50F Y DRIVE Assy 50F Y DRIVE Assy Note: When removing the POWER SUPPLY Unit, be sure to remove not only the POWER SUPPLY Unit but entire PCB base. 50F X DRIVE Assy
D

POWER SUPPLY Unit PCB base

Styling of jumper wires around the FAN motor

E

NG

50F Y DRIVE Assy

POWER SUPPLY Unit

OK
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

115

1

2

3

4

A

MAIN Assy

1 2 3 4 5
B

Disconnect cables, connectors, as required. Remove the two screws. Remove the two screws. Remove the POD cover. Remove the POD stay A with PCB. POD stay A

2

How to remove the bridge connector connecting between the MAIN and TANSHI Assys
(1) Grip the two short edges of the connector with longnose pliers. (2) Insert a finger between the longnose pliers and the board to protect the board and the mounted parts on the board from accidental damage by the pliers then, using your finger as a fulcrum and the pliers as a lever, pry the connector upward to remove it.

5

2

POD Assy

3 4
TANSHI Assy

3
POD cover MAIN Assy

C

TANSHI Assy

MAIN Assy

3 Terminal Panel B (50U)
D

1 2 3 4 5

Remove the four screws. Remove the two screws. Remove the 10 screws. Remove the four screws. Remove the terminal panel B (50U).

3 3 3 4 2 1
×4

3

3

3

3 3 3

2 4
TANSHI Assy

5 4 4

3
Terminal panel B (50U) Terminal panel A (U)

E

Note: The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual wiring, because the product in the photo is a prototype. Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original wiring of the unit after repair work.

Tightening sequence for the screws when assembling
When assembling the terminal panel B (50U), tighten the screws in the following sequence:

1

2

F

1 2 3

Tighten the screw. Tighten the screw. Tighten other screws.

116
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

4 Front Case Assy (508FU)

A

1 2 3

Remove the four rivets. Pull the lower part of the Front case Assy (508FU) toward you and out. Remove the Front case Assy (508FU), by pulling it upward.

3
Front case Assy (508FU)

B

2

1 1
Rivet Turn it not to press the rivet. (Because when the rivet presses, fit in once again.) When assembling the front case, tighten this rivet first. Front side

C

1

1

1

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

117

1

2

3

4

A

5 Access to 50F DIGITAL Assy

1 2 3

Disconnect the cable. Remove the two screws. Remove the four screws.

1 3 2

Multi base section

2

3

B

3

3

C

4

Lift the Multi base section to the direction of the arrow.

Multi base section

4

D

Multi base section

PANEL SENSOR Assy

E

F

50F DIGITAL Assy

118
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

6 Exchange of SCAN IC
Front chassis HT (508F) Assy

A

1 2 3

Remove the four screws. Remove the two screws. Remove the front chassis HT (508F) Assy.

1

1

2

1

3

1

2
B

Front chassis HT (508F) Assy

Front chassis HB Assy (50)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Disconnect the two jumper wires. Remove the one screw. Remove the FHD RLS Assy. Remove the two screws. Remove the two screws. Remove the two screws. Remove the front chassis HB Assy (50).

4

4
C

6

5

7

5

6

FHD IR Assy

2 3 1 1
FHD RLS Assy 50FHD LED Assy
D

Panel holder V1 (50), V2 (50)

1 2 3

Remove the two screws. Unhook the six hooks. Remove the panel holders V1 (50) and V2 (50). Panel holder V2 (50) Panel holder V1 (50)

E

1 2

2

3

2 2

3

2

2

1
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

119

1

2

3

4

A

Front chassis VL (508F)

1 2 3

Loosen the jumper wire. Remove the three screws. Remove the front chassis VL (508F).

2
B

2 1

2

Exchange

3

Front chassis VL (508F)

50F Y DRIVE Assy
C

SCAN IC
×4

SCAN IC
×4

* *

SCAN IC
×4

SCAN IC
×4

*
50F SCAN A Assy 50F SCAN B Assy 50F SCAN C Assy

*
50F SCAN D Assy

D

Notes for Three pieces connector 40P*
Three pieces connector 40P is a precision part. Pay attention to the handling. Connecting Method Disconnecting Method

OK

OK

OK

NG

NG

In addition, please do not touch the electrode plane.
E

NG

NG

F

120
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM
A

SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
Be careful in handling this product, because scratches on cabinet coating are easily noticeable. When working on this unit, be sure to place the cabinet on a piece of soft cloth for protection.

(1) Grille Assy
The Grille Assy is secured to the baffle plate with two-sided tape and bosses. When removing the Grille Assy, it is necessary to wear cotton gloves. - Disassembly 1. Insert the tip of your gloved finger into the gap between the Grille Assy in front and the corner of the baffle plate so that the Grille Assy is slightly lifted.

- Reassembly Remove the old two-sided tape attached to the rear side of the Grille Assy and the front side of the baffle, and adhere new two-sided tape. Press the bosses into the baffle plate and press the entire grill into position. (Press the bosses from the woofer frame.)

(2) Woofer (Disassembly)
The woofer is secured to the baffle plate with four screws from the inside. To remove the woofer, first remove the baffle plate. - Reassembly When reassembling the woofer, place it so that its + terminal is suitable for the inside. Tighten the screws to the baffle.

B

(3) Tweeter (Disassembly)
2. Insert the gloved finger to the extent of the second joint into the gap between the cabinet and the Grille Assy. The tweeter is secured to the baffle plate with two screws from the inside. To remove the tweeter, first remove the baffle plate. - Reassembly When reassembling the tweeter, + terminal is in the topside.
C

Network Assy (Caution)
When removing the Network Assy, pull it out a little at a time from alternate sides, because it is seated tightly. 2 3. Alternately and gradually lift the left and right sides of the Grille Assy by about 5 cm, sliding gloved fingers along the cabinet. When lifting the Grille Assy, be sure to lift the left and right sides alternately, but not both sides simultaneously. 1 1
Input terminal
D

Network Assy

Note: Be careful not to bend the Grille Assy too far. Otherwise, it may be damaged. OK: Good example NG: Bad example
Grille Assy

Baffle Assy (Caution)
When reassembling the cabinet and the baffle plate, secure the screws in the order shown in the figure below: 1 2 3 4 5 6
E

OK
Baffle Grille Assy

Front 1 3 1

NG
Baffle

F

2 2 Rear
PDP-5010FD 121
7 8 6

5

1

2

3

4

8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A

1. At shipment, the unit is adjusted to its best conditions. Normally, it is not necessary to readjust even if an assembly is replaced. If the adjustment is shifted or if it becomes necessary to readjust because of part replacement, etc., perform the adjustment as described below. 2. Any value changed in Service/Factory mode will be stored in memory as soon as it is changed. Before readjustment, take note of the original values for reference in case you need to restore the original settings. 3. Use a stable AC power supply.

B

8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED
When any of the following assemblies is replaced
POWER SUPPLY Unit Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and “8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT”. Writing of backup data is required. Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)”. No adjustment required No adjustment required Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and “8.4 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED”. No adjustment required Writing of backup data is required. Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)”. No adjustment required

DIGITAL Assy

C

X DRIVE Assy Y DRIVE Assy Service Panel Assy

MAIN Assy (*)
D

PANEL SENSOR Assy

Other assemblies

E

Note: Checking the Cable Card ID The PDP has a slot for a cable card that is used for managing your information by the cable TV company. The following procedure allows you to check your Cable Card ID and the Host ID. 1. Press HOME MENU. 2. Select “Tuner Setup”. ( / then ENTER) 3. Select “Channel Setup”. ( / then ENTER) 4. Select “POD ID”. ( / ) • The Host ID and Cable Card ID appear. 5. Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

F

(*) : When replacing the MAIN Assy, be sure to perform the FINAL SETUP.

122
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Notes on replacing parts For the parts described in the list below, replacement is required for the whole Assy, not only the defective part. If any part listed below is identified as defective and needs replacement, replace the whole Assy, and make necessary adjustments after replacement. Reason: The whole Assy must be replaced, because adjustments and data rewriting for the Assy at the level of production line are required. Parts that Require Whole-Assy Replacement Ref No.
IC4601 IC4701 IC4703 IC4801 AWV2457 MAIN Assy IC5001 IC5102 IC5103 IC5104 IC5203 IC6401 IC6602 IC6603 IC6604 IC6605 IC6902 IC8204 IC8301 IC8602 AWV2510 AWV2511

PCB Assy No.

Assy Name

Function Name
AV switch RGB switch EEPROM MAIN VDEC A/D Converter EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM SYSTEM IC DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM Flash ROM Flash ROM Flash UCOM Flash ROM R2S11006FT R2S11001FT

Part No.
B

BR24L01AFJ-W CM0048BF AD9985KSTZ-110 BR24L02FV-W BR24L02FV-W BR24L02FV-W BR24L02FV-W BCM7038KPB1G-B2 K4H561638H-UCB3 K4H561638H-UCB3 K4H561638H-UCB3 K4H561638H-UCB3 AGC1057 AGC1049 AGC1037 AGC1039
C

50F X DRIVE Assy • Parts of X D-D CON BLOCK 50F Y DRIVE Assy • Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 1 • Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 2
D

POWER SUPPLY Unit MAIN Assy DIGITAL Assy

The assembly must be replaced as a unit, and no part replacement is allowed. No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those mentioned above. No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those mentioned above. No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED. No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED. No adjustment required No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those mentioned above. No adjustment required
PDP-5010FD 123
7 8 F

E

X DRIVE Assy

Y DRIVE Assy

ADDRESS Assy PANEL SENSOR Assy TANSHI Assy

5

6

1

2

3

4

8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)

A

Outline
Adjustment data are stored in the EEPROM (4K) on the DIGITAL Assy in the production process. Those adjustment data are also automatically stored in the EEPROM (for backup) on the PANEL SENSOR Assy. If the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, those adjustment data for backup can be copied from the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR Assy to a new DIGITAL Assy.

Backed up data
• Drive voltage adjustment value • Hour-meter count • Pulse-meter count • Panel white balance adjustment value • Serial No. • Drive waveform adjustment value • P-ON counter value • PD/SD histories

B

How to copy backup data 1. When the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service (usual service)
Adjustment data can be restored by copying the data backed up in the PANEL SENSOR Assy to the EEPROM on a new DIGITAL Assy. The EEPROM on the new DIGITAL Assy has no adjustment data, and the EEPROM for backup in the PANEL SENSOR Assy has adjustment data. After replacing the DIGITAL Assy, enter PANEL FACT. mode, display the PANEL INFORMATION page, then check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" and "ADJUSTED" is set for "BACKUP". Then, proceed in the following steps:
C

(1) Copying, using the Factory menu 1 Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode. 2 Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below. PANEL INFORMATION Key Down 7th ETC. (+)
D

SET BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT Right BACKUP DATA : TRANSFER SET (5 sec) 3 Turn the power off. • After the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service, be sure to check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" on the PANEL INFORMATION page of the PANEL FACT. mode. • If copying of the backup data fails in the above procedure, the red LED lights, and the blue LED flashes, as a warning that no backup data were copied. • If both the DIGITAL and PANEL SENSOR Assys are to be replaced, first replace the PANEL SENSOR Assy, turn the unit on and back off again, then replace the DIGITAL Assy. (2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands 1 Turn on the unit, using the remote control unit or by issuing the PON command. Then issue the FAY command. 2 Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup. 3 Turn the power off.

E

F

124
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

2. When a secondhand DIGITAL Assy that had been mounted in another product is to be reused
As adjustment data for another product are already stored in the secondhand DIGITAL Assy, first delete those data then copy the backup data stored in the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR Assy. (1) Copying, using the Factory menu 1 Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode. 2 Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below.
B

PANEL INFORMATION Key Down 7th ETC. (+) SET BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT Key Down
C

DIGITAL EEPROM : NO OPRT Right DIGITAL EEPROM : DELETE SET (5 sec) Key Up BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT Right BACKUP DATA : TRANSFER SET (5 sec) 3 Turn the power off. Note: If the secondhand DIGITAL Assy is mounted in the product then the unit is turned on then back off again, the data in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy are copied over the EEPROM in the PANEL SENSOR Assy. Thus the backup data can never be restored. During the first power-on after the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, be sure to enter Factory mode to copy the backup data. Or, before removing the secondhand DIGITAL Assy from the original product, delete the adjustment data on it, using the Factory mode (DIGITAL EEPROM: DELETE), mount it to the product to be repaired, then copy the data from the backup EEPROM.
D

E

(2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands 1 Turn on the unit, using the remote control unit or by issuing the PON command. Then issue the FAY command. 2 Issue the UAJ command to delete data stored in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy. 3 Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup. 4 Turn the power off.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

125

1

2

3

4

A

3. In a case where normal backup data are not stored in the backup EEPROM because the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy is defective, etc., and where manually adjusted values are to be applied to the product
Note: In this section, it is assumed that settings for various items have been completed, using Factory menu or RS-232C commands. (1) Method using the Factory menu 1 Set various setting/adjustment values. 2 Proceed in the following steps.
B

PANEL INFORMATION Key Down 7th ETC. (+) SET BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT
C

Key Down DIGITAL EEPROM : NO OPRT Right DIGITAL EEPROM : REPAIER SET (5 sec) 3 Turn the power off.

D

Note: When a DIGITAL Assy with an EEPROM in which adjustment data are stored is mounted, this step is not required after manual adjustment. ("DIGITAL EEPROM: REPAIR" is not indicated.) (2) Method using the RS-232C commands Issue the FAJ command.

E

F

126
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA
A

Clearance of various logs after the Assys are replaced
Besides adjustment data, data on accumulated power-on time and logs on defective parts of the product are backed up. Some of those data must be cleared after the Assys are replaced for service. (1) Clearance of logs, using the RS-232C commands
Item Content When the Panel is replaced Must be cleared Must be cleared (mandatory) Must be cleared Must be cleared No need to be cleared Must be cleared When the POWER When the Other SUPPLY Unit parts is replaced is replaced No need to be cleared No need to be cleared No need to be cleared No need to be cleared Must be cleared (mandatory) Must be cleared No need to be cleared No need to be cleared No need to be cleared No need to be cleared No need to be cleared Must be cleared RS-232C Commands CHM CPM CSD CPD CPC CMT
B

Hour-meter Pulse-meter Shutdown history Power-down history Power-on counter MAX TEMP

Accumulated power-on time Accumulated number of pulses emitted Cause of an SD and hour-meter count Cause of an PD and hour-meter count Relay-on count Historical max. temperature

Notes: • As the pulse-meter count is used for each correction function, it must be cleared when an Assy relevant to correction functions is replaced. • When clearing logs, using the RS-232C commands, first enter Factory mode (by issuing FAY or PFY), then issue the corresponding command. (2) Clearance of logs, using the Factory menu 1 Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode. 2 Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. Delete various logs, as shown in the figure below. PANEL INFORMATION Key Down 7th ETC. (+) SET BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT Key Down BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT Key Down DIGITAL EEPROM : NO OPRT Key Down PD INFO. < = > : NO OPRT SD INFO. < = > : NO OPRT HR-MTR INFO. < = > : NO OPRT PM/B1-B5 < = > : NO OPRT P COUNT INFO. < = > : NO OPRT MAX TEMP. < = > : NO OPRT 3 Turn the power off.
PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

C

D

E

Right Right Right Right Right Right

PD INFO. < = > : CLEAR SD INFO. < = > : CLEAR HR-MTR INFO. < = > : CLEAR PM/B1-B5 < = > : CLEAR P COUNT INFO. < = > : CLEAR MAX TEMP. < = > : CLEAR

SET (5 sec) SET (5 sec) SET (5 sec) SET (5 sec) SET (5 sec)
F

SET (5 sec)

127

1

2

3

4

8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED

A

After the panel is replaced with one for service, voltage margin adjustment is required.

[Preparation]
Basically, voltage margin adjustment is performed using the Panel Factory menu. After the panel is replaced and the unit is turned on, clear the pulse meter first. For details on how to clear the pulse meter, see "8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA". ∗1: As various corrections are made referring to the pulse-meter count to calculate how long the panel has been used, if adjustment of the panel for service is performed without clearing the pulse-meter count, proper adjustments will not be performed. ∗2: The drive sequence for 60-Hz video is used for adjustment. When adjustment is made using the Panel Factory menu, the current drive sequence is displayed on the screen, as shown in the figure below. Make sure that 60VS is always indicated during adjustment.

B

1 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

32

P AN E L

FAC T .

I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RG B – J H B [ TBL 1 / 6 0 VS ]

C

5

10

15 16

1 P AN E L – 1 A D J 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D VOL O F F S E T < => E

Drive sequence indication

: 12 8

Example of the On-Screen display during Panel Factory mode
D

[Supplement]
In the "PANEL-1ADJ" layer, the Panel White Balance value is reset to default, Panel Gamma is set to Straight, Noise is set to OFF, LUT mode is set to ON and Reset active control is set to OFF. In this case, "- - - - /∗∗∗∗" (∗∗∗∗ represents the current drive sequence) is displayed on the third line of the On-Screen display during Panel Factory mode. If adjustment is performed using RS-232C commands, the following commands must be transmitted for preparation: [PAV S00] : To set panel drive mode to Factory [VFQ S03] : To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz [WBI S01] : To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.) [PGR S00] : To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode [PGG S00] : To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode [PGB S00] : To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode [DIZ S03] : Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF. [$1800000001] : LUT mode ON [$1000003F00] : Reset active control OFF. ∗: If the unit is shut down during the above adjustment flow, resend the above commands from the beginning.
F

E

128
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Overview
Preparation
Clearing of the hour meter and pulse meter Aging with RST MASK 01 (White) displayed

Recovery flowchart (1) (Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage) (1-1)
Checking VOL OFFSET (min) (RST MASK 12: Light blue)

A

NG

(1-2)

OK NG

Note on voltage calculation
When calculating the setting voltage, round off to get rid of the fractional part.

Checking VOL OFFSET (min) (RST MASK 10: Pink)

OK Main flowchart (1) (VOL OFFSET check)
Checking VOL OFFSET (min) (RST MASK 12: Light blue) Checking VOL OFFSET (max) (RST MASK 02: Red)

NG

Range of margin measuring
Read the voltage within the hysteresis (stricter value).

OK NG NG Recovery flowchart (1) (Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage) (1-3) NG
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) (RST MASK 02: Red) Checking VOL OFFSET (max) (RST MASK 03: Green)

NG V
Adjustment value m+1 Adjustment value m

B

OK
Checking VOL OFFSET (min) (RST MASK 10: Pink)

OK
Erroneous discharge

OK
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) (RST MASK 02: Red)

NG

Read the voltage within this range.

No erroneous discharge Adjustment value n

OK
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) (RST MASK 03: Green)

(1-4) NG

OK NG
Erroneous discharge

Checking VOL OFFSET (max) (RST MASK 03: Green)

Adjustment value n-1

OK

OK
Checking VOL OFFSET (min) (RST MASK 12: Light blue)

NG

Definition of limits for the voltage margins (abnormal lit/dead cells)
Abnormal lit cells: • Five or fewer abnormal cells on the whole screen • Two or fewer abnormal cells within a radius of 1 cm Abnormal dead cells • Fifteen or fewer abnormal cells on the whole screen • Two or fewer abnormal cells within a radius of 1 cm

C

OK
Checking VOL OFFSET (min) (RST MASK 10: Pink)

NG

OK Recovery flowchart (2) (Changing the VOL YNOFS setting voltage) (2-1) NG
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min) (RST MASK 16: Green 1023+)

Main flowchart (2) (VOL YNOFS check)
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min) (RST MASK 16: Green 1023+)

NG

OK
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min) (RST MASK 15: Red 1023+)

OK NG NG NG
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min) (RST MASK 15: Red 1023+)

∗: Abnormal cells visually recognizable at a distance of 1 meter from the panel must be counted. ∗: Cells displayed abnormally for less than one second are not counted as abnormal cells.

D

OK
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (max) (RST MASK 22: Cyan 3SF)

OK
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (max) (RST MASK 22: Cyan 3SF)

NG

OK

OK Recovery flowchart (2) (Changing the VOL YNOFS setting voltage) (2-2)
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4 (min) (RST MASK 15: Red 1023+)

Definition of tones for the measuring signals
FHD signal (1920*1080)/Video 60-Hz sequence /Dither: ON, L dither: ON, noise: OFF
White

NG

OK Recovery flowchart (2) (Changing the VOL YNOFS setting voltage) (2-3)
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (max) (RST MASK 22: Cyan 3SF)

Adjustment completed

NG

Red Green Pink Light blue Red 1023+ Green 1023+ Cyan 3SF

RST MASK 01 (R 1023 /G 1023 /B 1023) RST MASK 02 (R 1023 /G 0 /B 0) RST MASK 03 (R 0 /G 1023 /B 0) RST MASK 10 (R 1023 /G 626 /B 1023) RST MASK 12 (R 626 /G 1023 /B 1023) RST MASK 15 (R 1023 /G 120 /B 120) RST MASK 16 (R 120 /G 1023 /B 120) RST MASK 22 (R 0 /G 169 /B 169)

E

OK
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min) (RST MASK 16: Green 1023+)

NG

Replacement with the parts for service
• Re-replacement of the panel • Replacement of the DRIVE Assy

OK
Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min) (RST MASK 15: Red 1023+)

NG

F

OK

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

129

1

2

3

4

A

Preparation before adjustment
[Replacement with the panel for service is completed.]
Procedures for resetting corrections for change over time Turn the unit on. / [PON]

Enter Factory mode. / [FAY]
B

Set PM/B1-B5 to CLEAR (to clear the pulse meter). / [CPM]

Set HR-MTR to CLEAR (to clear the hour meter). / [CHM]

Turn the unit off. / [POF]

C

Procedures for stabilizing the panel before adjustment Turn the unit on. / [PON] Indication example of the adjustment label of service panel

Enter Factory mode. / [FAY]

AWV9999Enter the initial values for the panel for service. VOL SUS (127 fixed) / [VSU 127] VOL OFFSET (VOF adjustment voltage) reduction / [VOF ***] VOL RST P (VRP adjustment voltage) reduction / [VRP ***] VOL XPOFS1 (087 fixed) / [VX1 087] VOL XPOFS2 (140 fixed) / [VX2 140] VOL YNOFS3 (VY3 adjustment voltage) reduction+10 / [VY3 ***] VOL YNOFS4 (VY4 adjustment voltage) reduction / [VY4 ***] VOL YNOFS1 (VY3 adjustment voltage) reduction-21 / [VY1 ***]

VOF=35V

VRP=170V VY3=184+α V VY4=200 Hour Meter_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _H Data 07/05/24 Chassis CXX99999 Time 18:27 Pnl FTEST123456
Note: α V sets adjustment value to 10.

D

Display RST MASK 01 (white). / [MKS S51]

Select Video 60-Hz sequence. / [VFQ S03]

* To store the [VFQ S03] command in memory, transmit it after displaying the mask.

E

Perform aging for 5 minutes.

[To the Main flowchart (1)]
Note: If you perform the adjustment by RS-232C commands, the following commands must be added before going to the main flowchart (1):

F

[PAV S00] [VFQ S03] [WBI S01] [PGR S00] [PGG S00] [PGB S00] [DIZ S03] [$1800000001] [$1000003F00]
130
1

: To set panel drive mode to Factory : To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz : To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.) : To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode : To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode : To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode : Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF. : LUT mode ON : Reset active control OFF.
PDP-5010FD
2 3 4

5

6

7

8

Main flowchart (1)...Checking VOL OFFSET
[From Preparation]

A

Display RST MASK 12 (Light blue). / [MKS S62]

Set VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value minus 64. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
B

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 10 (Pink). / [MKS S60]

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (1-1)

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 02 (Red). / [MKS S52]

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (1-2)

C

Set VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value plus 48. / [VOF ∗∗∗]

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 03 (Green). / [MKS S53]

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (1-3)

D

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Return VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value. / [VOF ∗∗∗]

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (1-4)

E

Determine the tentative setting value for VOL OFFSET as the final value.

From the Recovery flowchart (1-2) and (1-4)

[To the Main flowchart (2)]
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

131

1

2

3

4

A

Main flowchart (2)...Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1
[From the Main flowchart (1)]
Display RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+). / [MKS S66] Set VOL YNOFS3 to the tentative setting value minus 23. / [VY3 ***] Set VOL YNOFS4 to the tentative setting value minus 23. / [VY4 ***] Set VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value minus 23. / [VY1 ***]

B

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 15 (Red 1023+). / [MKS S65]
C

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (2-1)

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF). / [MKS S72] Set VOL YNOFS3 to the tentative setting value plus 23. / [VY3 ***] Set VOL YNOFS4 to the tentative setting value plus 23. / [VY4 ***] Set VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value plus 23. / [VY1 ***]

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (2-2)

D

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Return the VOL YNOFS3 to the tentative setting value. / [VY3 ***]
E

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (2-3)

Return the VOL YNOFS4 to the tentative setting value. / [VY4 ***] Return the VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value. / [VY1 ***] Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFS3 as the final value. Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFS4 as the final value. Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFS1 as the final value.

Note: Make sure that the following values become the final setting values. VOL SUS *1 VOL XPOSF2 *1 VOL OFFSET VOL YNOFS1 VOL RST P *1 VOL YNOFS3 VOL XPOFS1 *1 VOL YNOFS4 *1: The tentative setting value becomes the final value.

From the Recovery flowchart (2-1) and (2-3)
F

[Adjustment completed]

132
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Recovery flowchart (1-1)...Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (1)]

A

RST MASK 12 (Light blue)

Gradually increase the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (lit cell). The VOL OFFSET value must be 133 or less.
B

Current VOL OFFSET > 133?

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

No Display RST MASK 10 (Pink). / [MKS S60]

[To the Recovery flowchart (1-2)]

C

Recovery flowchart (1-2)...Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (1) / Recovery flowchart (1-1)]

RST MASK 10 (Pink)

D

Gradually increase the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (lit cell). The VOL OFFSET value must be 133 or less.

Current VOL OFFSET > 133?

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required
E

No Display RST MASK 02 (Red). / [MKS S52]

Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value plus 112. / [VOF ***]

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required
F

A
PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

133

1

2

3

4

A

A

Display RST MASK 03 (Green). / [MKS S53]

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No
B

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value minus 48. / [VOF ***]

Determine the current VOL OFFSET setting value as the final value.

[To the Main flowchart (2)]

C

Recovery flowchart (1-3)...Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (1) ]
RST MASK 02 (Red)

Gradually decrease the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (dead cell). The VOL OFFSET value must be 117 or greater.
D

Current VOL OFFSET < 117?

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

No Display RST MASK 03 (Green). / [MKS S53]

[To the Recovery flowchart (1-4)]
E

F

134
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Recovery flowchart (1-4)...Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (1) / Recovery flowchart (1-3)]
RST MASK 03 (Green)

A

Gradually decrease the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (dead cell). The VOL OFFSET value must be 117 or greater.
B

Current VOL OFFSET < 117?

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

No Display RST MASK 12 (Light blue). / [MKS S62]

Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value minus 112. / [VOF ***]

C

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 10 (Pink). / [MKS S60]

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

D

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value plus 64. / [VOF ***]

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

Determine the current VOL OFFSET setting value as the final value.
E

[To the Main flowchart (2)]

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

135

1

2

3

4

A

Recovery flowchart (2-1)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4/1 setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (2)]
RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+)

Set VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value. / [VY1 ***]
B

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value +4. / [VY3 ***]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value +4. / [VY4 ***]

Current VOL YNOFS3 setting value > 137?
C

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

No Yes

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?

No Display RST MASK 15 (Red 1023+). / [MKS S65]

D

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?

Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (2-2)

No

From the Recovery flowchart (2-2)

Display RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF). / [MKS S72]

E

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value +47. / [VY3 ***]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value +47. / [VY4 ***]

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No
F

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

B

136
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value minus 23. / [VY3 ∗∗∗]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value minus 23. / [VY4 ∗∗∗]

VOL YNOFS3 final setting value
Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS3 as the final value. Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS4 as the final value. Note: Make a note of this VOL YNOFS3 value. Set VOL YNOFS1 to the final setting value of VOL YNOFS3 minus 31. / [VY1 ∗∗∗]
B

Determine the current VOL YNOFS1 setting value as the final value.

[Adjustment completed]
C

Recovery flowchart (2-2)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4 setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (2) / Recovery flowchart (2-1)]
RST MASK 15 (Red 1023+) Set VOL YNOFS1 to the current setting value. / [VY1 ∗∗∗]
D

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value plus 4. / [VY3 ∗∗∗]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value plus 4. / [VY4 ∗∗∗]

Current VOL YNOFS3 setting value > 137?

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

E

No Yes

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?

No

[To the Recovery flowchart (2-1)]

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

137

1

2

3

4

A

Recovery flowchart (2-3)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4/1 setting voltage
[From the Main flowchart (2)]
RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF) Set VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value. / [VY1 ***]

B

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value minus 4. / [VY3 ***] Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value minus 4. / [VY4 ***]

Current VOL YNOFS3 setting value < 094?

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

No Yes

C

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)?

No Display RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+). / [MKS S66] Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value minus 47. / [VY3 ***] Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value minus 47. / [VY4 ***]

D

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No Display RST MASK 15 (Red 1023+). / [MKS S65]

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? (Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) No
E

Yes

Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value plus 23. / [VY3 ***] Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value plus 23. / [VY4 ***]

VOL YNOFS3 final setting value
Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS3 as the final value. Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS4 as the final value. Set VOL YNOFS1 to the final setting value of VOL YNOFS3 minus 31. / [VY1 ***]
F

Note: Make a note of this VOL YNOFS3 value.

Determine the current VOL YNOFS1 setting value as the final value.

[To the Main flowchart (2)]
138
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Setting Voltages
VOF Vysnofs (V)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 000 005 011 016 021 027 032 037 043 048 053 059 064 069 075 080 085 091 096 101 107 112 117 123 128 133 139 144 149 155 160 165 171 176 181 187 192 197 203 208 213 219 224 229 235 240 245 251 255

A

VRP Vyprst (V)
146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 002 003 005 007 009 011 013 014 016 018 020 022 024 025 027 029 031 033 035 036 038 040 042 044 046 047 049 051 053 055 057 058 060 062 064 066 068 069 071 073 075 077 079 080 082 084 086 088 090 093 095 097 099 100 102 104 106 108 110 111 113 115 117

VY1 Vyknofs1,2 (V)
161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 001 003 005 008 010 012 014 016 018 020 022 025 027 029 031 033 035 037 040 042 044 046 048 050 052 054 057 059 061 063 065 067 069 072 074 076 078 080 082 084 086 089 091 093 095 097 099 101 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 121 123 125 127 129 131 133

VY3 Vyknofs3 (V)
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 001 003 005 008 010 012 014 016 018 020 022 025 027 029 031 033 035 037 040 042 044 046 048 050 052 054 057 059 061 063 065 067 069 072 074 076 078 080 082 084 086 089 091 093 095 097 099 101 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 121 123 125 127 129 131 133

VY4 Vyknofs4 (V)
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 001 003 005 008 010 012 014 016 018 020 022 025 027 029 031 033 035 037 040 042 044 046 048 050 052 054 057 059 061 063 065 067 069 072 074 076 078 080 082 084 086 089 091 093 095 097 099 101 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 121 123 125 127 129 131 133

B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

139

1

2

3

4

A

Setting Voltages
VRP Vyprst (V)
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 119 121 122 124 126 128 130 132 133 135 137 139 141 143 144 146 148 150 152 154 155 157 159 161 163 165 166 168 170 172 174 176 177 179 181 183 185 187 188 190 192 194 196 198 199 201 203 205 207 209 210 212 214 216 218 220 221

VY1 Vyknofs1,2 (V)
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 153 155 157 159 161 163 165 168 170 172 174 176 178 180 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 197 200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 217 219 221 223 225 227 229 232 234 236 238 240 242 244 246 249 251 253 255

VY3 Vyknofs3 (V)
214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 153 155 157 159 161 163 165 168 170 172 174 176 178 180 182 185 187 189 191 193 195 198 200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 217 219 221 223 225 227 229 232 234 236 238 240 242 244 246 249 251 253 255

VY4 Vyknofs4 (V)
214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 153 155 157 159 161 163 165 168 170 172 174 176 178 180 182 185 187 189 191 193 195 198 200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 217 219 221 223 225 227 229 232 234 236 238 240 242 244 246 249 251 253 255

VRP Vyprst (V)
267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 223 225 227 229 231 232 234 236 238 240 242 243 245 247 249 251 253 254

B

C

D

E

F

140
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED
A

Waveform adjustments required when replacing the following parts of the X DRIVE and Y DRIVE Assys.
Assy Name
X DRIVE Assy

Ref No.
IC1101 IC1104 IC1204 IC1209

Part Name
PS9117AP TND307TD PS9117AP TND307TD PS9117AP TND307TD TND307TD PS9117AP TND307TD

Part Category
Photo Coupler FET Driver Photo Coupler FET Driver Photo Coupler FET Driver FET Driver Photo Coupler FET Driver

Remarks

Y DRIVE Assy

IC2101 IC2103 IC2104 IC2201 IC2203

B

TIME LAG ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-B)
1 Measure the time lag for the SUS-U signal to the SUS-B signal. 2 Check the time lag for the SUS-B Gate signal to the SUS-U Gate siganl. Adjust the variable control so that the time lag of Gate becomes " time lag of input signal + α ± 5 nsec." Note: For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below.
C

50 % of the crest value SUS-U signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)

50 % of the crest value SUS-B signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)

time lag of SUS-U and SUS-B Δ Tsus-iub 5 V position SUS-U Gate signal X DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q1109) Y DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q2107) 5 V position SUS-B Gate signal X DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q1220) Y DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q2217) time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate Δ Tsus - gub

D

E

Time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate : Δ Tsus - gub Adjust so that "Δ Tsus - gub = Δ Tsus - iub + α ± 5 nsec," using the variable controls shown in the table below:

Assy X DRIVE Assy Y DRIVE Assy

VR VR1002 VR2002

Value of α 70 nsec 60 nsec
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

141

1

2

3

4

A

DELAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-D)
1 Measure the pulse width of the SUS-D signal. 2 Check the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q2111). Adjust the variable control so that the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q2111) becomes the same pulse width ± 5 nsec as the SUS-D signal. Note: • Be sure to set the Drive to OFF for adjustment. • For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below.

B

SUS-D pulse width Tsus - D

50 % of the crest value SUS-D signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)

50 % of the crest value

SUS-D pulse width Tsus - Dg

C

50 % of the crest value SUS-D signal (input to the gate terminal of Q2111)

50 % of the crest value

D

SUS-D pulse width: Tsus - Dg Adjust so that "Tsus - Dg = Tsus - D ± 5 nsec," using the variable control shown in the table below:

Assy Y DRIVE Assy

VR VR2001

E

F

142
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

SUS-B ADJUSTMENT
X DRIVE Assy
TP1127 from DIGITAL Assy XSUS-U IC1104 IC1002_A1 Pin 2 IC1101 Photo Coupler Q1108 IGBT Q1104 Q1116 IGBT

1 Measure the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time (Δ Tsus - iub).

2 Adjust the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time so that it becomes "Δ Tsus - iub + 70 ± 5 nsec."
Q1204

TP1119

B
TP1258 Q1218 FET

Q1205

TP1204 Q1219 FET

from DIGITAL Assy XSUS-B

VR1002 IC1001_A1 Pin 2 IC1204 Photo Coupler

IC1209 Q1206 TP1205

Q1220 FET Q1207 TP1206 Q1221 FET

Y DRIVE Assy
TP2105 Q2106 IGBT Q2104 TP2106 Q2107 IGBT TP2107 Q2108 IGBT TP2108

C

from DIGITAL Assy YSUS-U

IC2103 IC2001_A4 Pin 5 IC2101 Photo Coupler

1 Measure the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time (Δ Tsus - iub).

2 Adjust the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time so that it becomes "Δ Tsus - iub + 60 ± 5 nsec."
Q2204 TP2204

Q2109 IGBT

D

from DIGITAL Assy YSUS-B

VR2002 IC2001_A6 Pin 7 IC2201 Photo Coupler

IC2203 Q2205 TP2205

Q2217 FET

Q2218 FET Q2206 TP2206 Q2219 FET Q2207 TP2207 Q2220 FET

E

SUS-D ADJUSTMENT
Y DRIVE Assy
1 Measure the SUS-D pulse width (Tsus - D).
TP2114 from DIGITAL Assy YSUS-D VR2001 IC2005_A7 Pin 8 IC2104 Q2105

2 Adjust the pulse width (Tsus - Dg) of the SUS-D input signal so that it becomes "Tsus-D ± 5 nsec."

Q2111 IGBT

F
Q2113 IGBT TP2116

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

143

1

2

3

4

8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT

A

Attachment of the housing wire
The housing wire (J126) is attached to the P11 terminal of the POWER SUPPLY unit. As the housing wire is not provided with the POWER SUPPLY unit for service, when replacing the POWER SUPPLY unit, remove the housing wire (J126) from the old one and attach it to the new one. NEVER turn on the unit before replacement, as doing so may damage the PC boards or the product. Note: The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual power supply unit, because the product in the photo is a prototype.

B

POWER SUPPLY unit

C

D

1

Disconnect the housing wire (J126) from the P11 terminal on the old POWER SUPPLY Unit.

2

Connect the housing wire (J126) to the P11 terminal on the new POWER SUPPLY Unit.

Housing wire (J126)

Housing wire (J126)

E

1
P11

2
P11

F

POWER SUPPLY unit (old)

POWER SUPPLY unit (new)

144
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9. RS-232C
9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND
9.1.1 PREPARED TOOLS
It is necessary to prepare the following one to use 232C command. • PC • Application for control • 232C cable (straight) ∗ The setting of the Com port cannot be communicated if it doesn't do correctly. (Please follow a set explanation of PC in the Com port)
A

B

9.1.2 USING RS-232C COMMANDS
Individual ports are provided for RS-232C and SR+ connectors with this model. Therefore, unlike the case of previous models, which required switching of exclusive operation between these connectors on the Integrator menu, switching is no longer required.

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

145

1

2

3

4

9.2 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS

A

RS-232C commands can be used in Service Factory mode. Before using RS-232C commands, it is necessary to change the factory presetting. See "9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND". [Note ; If you want to see version infomation (ex. QS1, QSE, Factory, Menu), Please see 10 seconds after starting.]

RS-232C command list
Command Name
A ABL AMT
B

Function

Active U-com
MDU MTB % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % %

Last Memory

Effective only in Factory mode
%

Remarks

∗∗∗ S00 S01

Adjusting the upper limit of the power Audio mute OFF Audio mute ON ADDRESS L1, L2 setting ADDRESS L3, L4 setting ADDRESS U1, U2 setting ADDRESS U3, U4 setting 1V average pulse number setting APL interlocked function: OFF APL interlocked function: ON APL interlocked WB: ON / APL interlocked γ : OFF APL interlocked WB: OFF / APL interlocked γ : ON

Mod

AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3 APN APW

S∗∗ S∗∗ S∗∗ S∗∗ ∗∗∗ S00 S01 S02 S03

Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod

% % % % % % % % %

UP*/DN* is not effective

C

B BCP BHI BLW BRT BSM ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ S00 S01 C CBU CHM Clearing backup data of EEPROM Clearing data of the hour meter FWD REV CHR CNT CMT CPC CPD CPM CSD CTM D ∗∗∗ Changing tuner preset channel (1 step forward) Changing tuner preset channel (1 step reverse) Clearing data of the hour meter of MTB side User contrast Clearing data of the maximum temperature Clearing power-on count data Clearing power-down histrory Clearing data of the pulse meter Clearing shutdown history Releasing the TRAP SW % % Copying the backup data in the EEPROM User white balance : BLUE highlight User white balance : BLUE lowlight User brightness After image/Burning safe mode: OFF After image/Burning safe mode: ON %

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

D

CHN

%

UP*/DN* is not effective
% % % % %

E

DIZ

S00 S01 S02 S03

Dither/L dither OFF & noise OFF Dither/L dither ON & noise ON Dither/L dither OFF & noise ON Dither/L dither ON & noise OFF Panel drive-power OFF Panel drive-power ON To subtract ∗∗∗ to the adjustment value (∗∗∗ = 000 to 999, designated by a function command)

% % % %

DRV

S00 S01

DW*

F

146
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Command Name
F FAJ FAN FAY FST

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % %

Active U-com

Remarks

Determining the flag of the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "adjustment is completed" Factory mode OFF Factory mode ON Set each memory setting of MTB side to the shipment state.

G
GHI GLW ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ User white balance : GREEN highlight User white balance : GREEN low light % %

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

B

I INA ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗ Switching the terrestrial analog signal (ANTENNA A) (∗∗∗: channel number) Switching the terrestrial digital signal (ANTENNA A) (∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗: channel number) Switching to the ANTENNA A INB ∗∗∗ Switching the terrestrial analog signal (ANTENNA B) (∗∗∗:channel number) Switching to the ANTENNA B INH INP S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 M MIR S00 S01 S02 S03 MKC S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 MKS S00 S01 S02 Mirror mode: OFF (default) Mirror mode: Right and left inversion Mirror mode: Top and bottom inversion Mirror mode: Top and bottom and right and left inversion Panel mask indication off H ramp (slant 1) M H ramp (slant 4) M Slanting ramp M 30 for aging 05 for aging Erasing afterimage 1 Erasing afterimage 2 White (change in luminance level) PEAK detection raster Address lack check Green vertical line scroll Green horizontal line scroll Vertical ramp vertical scroll (white) Vertical ramp vertical scroll (green) Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (white) Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (green) Cross hatch + window MASK OFF H ramp (slant 1) H ramp (slant 4) % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % %
F E D

% % % % % % % % % % % % % %

Main Main Main Main Main

Switching the HomeGallery (Home Media Gallery for the ELITE model) Input switch: INPUT 1 Input switch: INPUT 2 Input switch: INPUT 3 Input switch: INPUT 4 Input switch: INPUT 5 Input switch: INPUT 6 Input switch: INPUT 7 Input switch: INPUT 8 (PC)

Main Main Main Main Main Main Main Main

C

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

147

1

2

3

4

A

Command Name
M MKS S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08
B

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % %

Active U-com

Remarks

V ramp (slant 1) Slanting ramp Window (Hi= 870, Lo= 102) Window (Hi= 1023, Lo= 102) Window (Hi= 1023, Lo=000) Window (Hi= 1023) 4 % Window (Hi= 1023) 1.25 % Window (1/7 LINE) STRIPE (MGT/GRN) STRIPE (GRN/MGT) B & W, checker (1 line) B & W, checker (2 lines) B & W, checker (4 lines) B & W, checker (8 lines) COLOR BAR Slanting lines Red & black, checker (1 line) Red & black, checker (2 lines) Red & black, checker (4 lines) Red & black, checker (8 lines) Erasing afterimage (RGB: zigzag, V: reverse) SUS 2000 pulses (black raster) 1 for perfect linear 2 for perfect linear 3 for perfect linear 4 for perfect linear RGB checker 1 RGB checker 2 Window RED (RED=1023) Window GREEN (GREEN=1023) Window BLUE (BLUE=1023) Even line horizontal stripes Odd line horizontal stripes Afterimage check 1 Afterimage check 2 Afterimage check 3 Afterimage check 4 Red single-color slanting ramp GREEN single-color slanting ramp BLUE single-color slanting ramp For panel light check 1 For panel light check 2 5 for perfect linear 6 for perfect linear 7 for perfect linear 8 for perfect linear Mask for ABL adjustment Raster - White Raster - Red Raster - Green

S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18

C

S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28

D

S29 S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 S37 S38

E

S39 S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49

F

S51 S52 S53

148
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Command Name
MKS S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 S67 S68 S69 S70 S71 S72 S73 S74 S75 MST S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S08 N NGP S00 S01 O OSD S00 S01 P PAV S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 S10 Panel drive mode (FACTORY) Panel drive mode (STANDARD) Panel drive mode (DYNAMIC) Panel drive mode (MOVIE) Panel drive mode (GAME) Panel drive mode (SPORTS) Panel drive mode (PURE) Panel drive mode (USER) Panel drive mode (ISF-DAY) Panel drive mode (ISF-NIGHT) Panel drive mode (OPTIMUM Turning OSD setting to off Turning OSD setting to on Raster - Blue Raster - Black Raster - Cyan Raster - Magenta Raster - Yellow Raster - Pink Raster - Cyan 291 Raster - Yellow egg color Raster - Light blue Raster - Beige Raster - Gray 291 Raster - Red 1023+ Raster - Green 1023+ Raster - Blue 1023+ Raster - Red 626 Raster - Green 626 Raster - Blue 626 Raster - Gray 2SF Raster - Cyan 3SF Raster - Magenta 3SF Raster - Yellow 3SF Raster - Gray 307 Display one screen PsideP (Main size: normal) PinP (Right down) PinP (Right up) PinP (Left up) PinP (Left down) SWAP (Exchanging sub-screen)

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod

Active U-com

Remarks

B

C

D

Negative positive inversion: OFF (default) Negative positive inversion: ON

Main Main

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

149

1

2

3

4

A

Command Name
P PBH PBL PDM ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ S00 S01 PES
B

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod % % % % % % % During PFY % Mod Mod % %

Active U-com

Remarks

Panel white balance adjustment - Blue highlight Panel white balance adjustment - Blue low light Passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => Power-down Not passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => No power-down For general-purpose commonness: Standard For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 1 For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 2 For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard Peripheral luminance correction: OFF Peripheral luminance correction: ON fixed Peripheral luminance correction: APL interlocked ON (default) It does not return the hierarchy character of the panel factory It returns the hierarchy character of the panel factory Factory mode: OFF Setup at shipment Factory mode: ON

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

S00 S01 S02 S10 S11 S12

PFL

S00 S01 S02

PFM

S00 S01

PFN
C

PFS PFY PGB S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07

Blue-independent gamma setting: Straight Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.7 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.8 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.9 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.0 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.1 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default) Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.3 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4

D

S08 S09

S10-31 Blue-independent gamma setting: Customize PGG S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06
E

Green-independent gamma setting: Straight Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.7 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.8 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.9 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.0 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.1 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default) Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.3 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4

S07 S08 S09 ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗

S10-31 Green-independent gamma setting: Customize PGH PGL Panel white balance adjustment - Green highlight Panel white balance adjustment - Green low light

F

150
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Command Name
P PGR S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Main Main Main Main % % Main Main % % % % % % % % % %

Active U-com

Remarks

Red-independent gamma setting: Straight Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.7 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.8 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.9 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.0 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.1 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default) Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.3 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4

B

S10-31 Red-independent gamma setting: Customize PKD S00 S01 PKL S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 PMT S00 S01 POF PON PPT S00 S01 PRH PRL PUC ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ S00 S01 S02 S03 Q QAJ QMT QNG QPD QPM QPW QS1 QS2 QS3 QSE QSD QSI QSP Acquiring various adjustment values Acquiring temperature of MTB side and Fan speed Acquiring shutdown information of MTB side Acquiring logs of power-down points Acquiring data of the pulse meter Acquiring panel white balance adjustment values Acquiring unit data, such as the software version common to all models, regardless of destination Acquiring data on the status of the unit, such as temperature Each information output for panel Acquiring unit data, such as the software version common to all models, regardless of destination Acquiring data on shutdown Acquiring data related with signals Acquiring the software sub-version of the microcomputer at panel side Peak luminance detection: OFF Peak luminance detection: ON Panel brightness setting No brightness limitation : 100 % (default) Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 1 : 87 % Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 2 : 73 % Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 3 : 60 % Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 4 : 52 % Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 5 : 40 % Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 6 : 27 % Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 7 : 13 % Canceling panel muting Panel muting Power OFF Power ON Panel protection: OFF Panel protection: ON Panel white balance adjustment - Red highlight Panel white balance adjustment - Red low light Pure cinema: off Pure cinema: Standard Pure cinema: Advance Pure cinema: Smooth

C

D

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

% % % % % % % % % % % % %
F E

%

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

151

1

2

3

4

A

Command Name
R R1K R2K RBL ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ S00 S01 S02 S03
B

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % %

Active U-com

Remarks

First reset (wedge width) Second reset (wedge width) BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: Lv0 (no correction) BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV1 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV2 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV3 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV4 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV5 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV6 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV7 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: Lv0 (no correction) GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV1 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV2 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV3 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV4 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV5 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV6 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV7 User white balance - Red highlight Room light sensor operation : OFF Room light sensor operation : 1 Room light sensor operation : 2 Room light sensor operation : 3 Room light sensor operation : 4 Room light sensor operation : 5 User white balance - Red low light RED setting for panel degradation correction: Lv0 (no correction) RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV1 RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV2 RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV3 RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV4 RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV5 RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV6 RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV7

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

S04 S05 S06 S07 RGL S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05

C

S06 S07 RHI RLS ∗∗∗ S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 RLW ∗∗∗ S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S SDM S00 S01 SFR S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08

UP*/DN* is not effective

UP*/DN* is not effective

D

RRL

Shutdown enabled Shutdown prohibited Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 1 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 2 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 3 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 4 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 5 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 6 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 7 Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 8

% % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod

% % % % % % % % % %

E

F

152
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

Command Name
S SKM S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 SMC S01 S02 SML SMM ∗∗∗ S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 SN0 SN1 SN2 SN3 SN4 SQM ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ S01 S02 S03 SSM S01 S02 SZM S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 T THS S00 S01 U UAJ UP∗

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Main Main Main Main Main Main % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % Main Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % % % % % %

Active U-com

Remarks

STREAKING correction mode OFF STREAKING correction mode 1 STREAKING correction mode 2 STREAKING correction mode 3 STREAKING correction mode 4 STREAKING correction mode 5 STREAKING correction mode 6 STREAKING correction mode 7 STREAKING correction mode 8 Smooth clear drive OFF Smooth clear drive ON (default) Adjustment of the side mask level Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: All screen detection (default) Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: 4:3 detection Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: 14:9 detection Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: D-BY-D detection VGA Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: D-BY-D detection SVGA Setting of the serial No. 0 (panel) Setting of the serial No. 1 (panel) Setting of the serial No. 2 (panel) Setting of the serial No. 3 (panel) Setting of the serial No. 4 (panel) Panel sequence mode: VIDEO sequence Panel sequence mode: PC sequence Panel sequence mode: FILM sequence SSCG OFF SSCG ON Setting the screen size to Dot by Dot Setting the screen size to 4 :3 Setting the screen size to FULL Setting the screen size to ZOOM Setting the screen size to CINEMA Setting the screen size to WIDE

B

C

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

It is necessary to wait for one minute after drive OFF

D

Theater port interlock operation OFF Theater port interlock operation ON

E

Determining the flag for the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "not adjusted" To add ∗∗∗ to the adjustment value (∗∗∗ = 000 to 999, designated by a function command)

% %

Mod

%

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

153

1

2

3

4

A

Command Name
V VFQ S01 S02 S03 S05 S06 S13
B

Function

Effective only Last in Factory Memory MDU MTB mode
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % % % %

Active U-com

Remarks

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-48 Hz Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-60 Hz Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-72 Hz Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-75 Hz Setting the frequency in Mask mode to PC-60 Hz Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz (nonstandard) Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-60 Hz (nonstandard) Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-72 Hz (nonstandard) Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-75 Hz (nonstandard) Adjustment of the reference value of Vysnofs voltage Vysnofs ADJUSTMENT

S22 S23 S25 S26 VOF VOL VRP VSU VX1 ∗∗∗

UP*/DN* is not effective

UP∗, DW∗, To adjust the volume (to be used in combination with UP∗/DW∗) ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyprst voltage Vyprst ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of the reference value of Vsus voltage Vsus ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs1 voltage Vxpofs1 ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs2 voltage Vxpofs2 ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs1, 2 voltage Vyknofs1,2 ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs3 voltage Vyknofs3 ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs4 voltage Vyknofs4 ADJUSTMENT

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

C

VX2 VY1 VY3 VY4 W WBI

S00 S01

Panel WB standard output mode: OFF Panel WB standard output mode: ON

% % % % %

% % Mod Mod Mod % % % % % % % % % % % % % % Mod % UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

X X1B X3B
D

∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗

3SF and later-first XSUS (resonance up width) 2SF-third XSUS (resonance up width) 2SF-repeat XSUS (resonance up width)

XSB Y Y1K Y1Z Y2B Y2K Y2Z YNK YNZ YTK

1SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width) 1SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width) 2SF-second YSUS (resonance up width) 2SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width) 2SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width) 3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (wedge width) 3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (resonance down width) 3SF and later-YSUS Tail (wedge width) 3SF and later-YSUS Tail (resonance down width) 2SF-repeat YSUS (resonance up width)

% % % % % % % % % %

Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod

UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective UP*/DN* is not effective

E

YTZ YSB Z ZME ZPR

Initializing the video EEPROM data Initializing the setting data to which no adjustment command is provided PANEL EEPROM REFLESH %

%

F

154
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9.3 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS
9.3.1 QS1 (PANEL STATUS)
A

Model information and version information are returned. Command Format
[QS1]

Effective Operation Modes
Every Time

Function
Output of status

Remarks
Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Resolution/Size Panel Generation Destination Grade Panel Product Form Boot version of Module microcomputer Program version of Module microcomputer Boot version of SQ_LSI Program version of SQ_LSI Panel information Reserved (panel section) , (comma) MTB generation MTB destination MTB grade MTB product form Program version of IF microcomputer Boot version of IF microcomputer Program version of Main microcomputer Boot version of Main microcomputer Program version of ASIC Boot version of ASIC CS (Check Sum)

Data Length
3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 3 byte 8 byte 3 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 4 byte 8 byte 4 byte 8 byte 4 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QS1 (Fixed) F 8 ∗ ∗ B 05F -02F 04F -01Y G8_50F ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ , 8 A H B 010AE 01A -01A 01A -01A 01A FF

15: MTB Generation
6 7 8 9 0 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10
B

16: MTB Destination
A C E G J U North America China Europe General Japan Australia
C

17: MTB Grade
H T B S R Elite/XDA/Step-upD Step-upA/XG/XC/Regular (US) Not used RegularD RegularA

D

18: MTB Product Form
S B System model One body model

1: Resolution/Size
3 4 5 6 7 E F G 1024∗768/42 1024∗768/43 1280∗768/50 1365∗768/50 1365∗768/60 1920∗1080/42 1920∗1080/50 1920∗1080/60

3: Destination
∗ A E J Commonness US (Reserved) EU (Reserved) Japan (Reserved)

10: Panel Information
1 to 3rd byte G8_ Generation information G8 + _(under bar) fixed 4 to 5th byte 42 50 60 ∗ 42 inch 50 inch 60 inch PSIZE information and SQ_LSI version mismatching (version mismatching at SD) FHD model XGA model Model information and SQ_LSI version mismatching (version mismatching at SD) Under bar 2nd PLANT (XGA 50 inch only) 1st PLANT (XGA 50 inch only) PLANT information and SQ_LSI version mismatching (version mismatching at SD) Others
F E

4: Grade
∗ Z Commonness Evaluation

6th byte

F X ∗

2: Panel Generation
6 7 8 9 0 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10

5: Panel Product Form
S B M D E System model All-in-one design TV Monitor Standard module Simple module

7th byte 8th byte

_ 6 4 ∗ ‘

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

155

1

2

3

4

9.3.2 QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA)

A

The command QS2 is for acquiring data on the panel's operational information.

Command Format
[QS2]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function

Remarks

To acquire data on operations of the panel Return data: 3 (ECO) + 34 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 39 Byte

Data Arrangement
B

Data Length
3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 3 byte 3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 3 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QS2 (fixed) 0 0 0 0 0 ∗∗ 063 0 0 0 0 00000437 0 7C

ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Power supply status Adjustment flag of the main unit Adjustment-data backup flag "1st PD" data "2nd PD" data Reserved Temperature data (TEMP 1) SD main data SD sub data Operation status induced by SD Reserved HOUR METER MASK indication Still picture detection SCAN protection detection Panel crack detection Address emergency detection Reserved CS

8: SD main data
0 1 2 3 4 No SD SQ_LSI communication error MDU-IIC communication error Abnormally in RST2 TEMP

9-1: SD-Sub (SQ_LSI)
0 1 2 3 4 5 No SD-Sub data Communication error Drive stop BUSY Version mismatching (H/S) Version mismatching (M/S)

C

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

9-2: SD-Sub (MDU-IIC)
0 1 2 3 4 No SD-Sub data EEPROM BACKUP DAC1 DAC2

D

18 19

9-3: SD-Sub (TEMP) 1: Power supply status
P 0 During power ON Entering Passive mode failed during standby Entering Passive mode succeeded during standby

4, 5: PD data
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 No PD data Not used POWER SCAN SCN-5V Y-DRV Y-DCDC Y-SUS ADRS X-DRV X-DCDC X-SUS DIG-DCDC Not used Not used UNKNOWN

0 1 2

No SD-Sub data TEMP1 high temperature TEMP1 low temperature

10: Operation status induced by SD
0 1 2 Normal Relay-off completed During warning indication

E

1

2: Adjustment flag of the main unit
0 1 Adjustment completed Adjustment not completed

7 8 9 A B

13: MASK indication
0 1 MASK-OFF MASK-ON

F

3: Adjustment-data backup flag
0 1 With backup data No backup data

C D E F

14 to 17: Detection of Each Protection function
0 1 Normal operation At detection of protection operation

156
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9.3.3 QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL)

The command QS3 is for acquiring data on operational information of the panel.

A

Command Format
[QS3]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function

Remarks

To acquire data on operations of the panel Return data: 3 (ECO) + 58 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 63 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SERIAL HOUR METER BACKUP HR METER PON COUNTER TEMP1 acquisition (Temperature value) TEMP0 acquisition (Temperature value) MaxTEMP acquisition (Temperature value) Reserved CS

Data Length
3 byte 15 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 5 byte 5 byte 5 byte 4 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QS3 --------------00000000 00000000 00000000 +25.0 (*1) +25.0 (*1) +75.0 (*1) ∗∗∗∗ FB
C B

Note (*1) : Centigrade scale

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

157

1

2

3

4

9.3.4 QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA)

A

The command QAJ is for acquiring the panel's factory-preset data. Command Format
[QAJ]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function
To acquire data on the setting value of drive voltage

Remarks
Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO
B

Data Length
3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QAJ 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 0 0 0 01 13 32 30 1 1 ∗∗ B7

31: Streaking correction
0 n OFF n: 1 to 8 (Mode n)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

V-SUS adjustment value Vysnofs adjustment value Vyprst adjustment value Vxpofs1 adjustment value Vxpofs2 adjustment value Vyknofs1,2 adjustment value Vyknofs3 adjustment value Vyknofs4 adjustment value R1K adjustment value R2K adjustment value Y1K adjustment value Y1Z adjustment value X1B adjustment value Y2B adjustment value X3B adjustment value YSB adjustment value XSB adjustment value YTK adjustment value YTZ adjustment value Y2K adjustment value Y2Z adjustment value YNK adjustment value YNZ adjustment value R-REVISE setting value G-REVISE setting value B-REVISE setting value ADDRESS 1, 2 setting value ADDRESS 3, 4 setting value ADDRESS 5, 6 setting value ADDRESS 7, 8 setting value Streaking correction AM radio countermeasure Reserved CS

32: AM radio countermeasure
n n: 1 to 8 (SUS frequency n)

C

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
D

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

E

29 30 31 32 33 34

F

158
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9.3.5 QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL)
The command QPW is for acquiring the factory-preset data about the video of the panel. Command Format
[QPW]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function

Remarks

A

To acquire data on the video setting value Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Drive sequence Standard/nonstandard Type of ABL/WB tables ABL adjustment value R-HIGH adjustment value G-HIGH adjustment value B-HIGH adjustment value R-LOW adjustment value G-LOW adjustment value B-LOW adjustment value R gamma setting G gamma setting B gamma setting Streaking correction Center luminance correction Reserved WB interlocked with APL Transition of protective operations Reserved CS

Data Length
3 byte 3 byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 3 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QPW (fixed) 60V S T1 128 256 256 256 512 512 512 07 07 07 0 1 ∗ 0 0 ∗∗ 39

1: Drive sequence
48V Video 48 Hz 50V Video 50 Hz 60V Video 60 Hz 72V Video 72 Hz 75V Video 75 Hz 60P PC 60 Hz 70P PC 70 Hz

3: Type of ABL/WB tables
n n: 1 to 4

11, 12, 13: RGB Gamma setting
n 00 to 31

15: Center luminance correction
0 1 2 OFF ON ON (interlocked with APL)

B

2: Standard/ nonstandard
S N Standard Nonstandard

17: WB interlocked with APL
0 OFF ON WB interlocked ON/γ OFF WB interlocked OFF/γ ON
C

14: Streking correction
0 1 OFF ON

1 2 3

18: Transition of brightness by protective operations
0 1 2 3 Upper limit state for brightness Brightness being reduced Lower limit state for brightness Brightness being increased

D

9.3.6 QPM (PULSE METER VALUE)
The command QPM is for acquiring the accumulated number of pulses of the panel. Command Format
[QPM]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function

Remarks

To acquire data on the accumulated number of pulses Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pulse meter B 1 Pulse meter B 2 Pulse meter B 3 Pulse meter B 4 Pulse meter B 5 CS

Data Length
3 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 2 byte

E

Output Example
QPM (fixed) 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 6E
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

159

1

2

3

4

9.3.7 QPD (PD LOGS)

A

The command QPD is for acquiring data from the 8 latest power-down (PD) logs. Command Format
[QPD]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function
To acquire data on the power-down logs

Remarks
Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1
B

Data Length
3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QPD (fixed) A 2 00010020 E 9 00008523 4 3 00004335 2 0 00000945 4 0 00000715 A 2 00000552 A 0 00000213 D 0 00000123 27

1, 2, 4, 5: PD data
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F No PD Not used P-POWER SCAN SCN-5V Y-DRIVE Y-DCDC Y-SUS Address X-DRIVE X-DCDC X-SUS DIGITAL-DC/DC Not used Not used UNKNOWN

Latest "1st PD" data Latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the latest PD Second latest "1st PD" data Second latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the second latest PD Third latest "1st PD" data Third latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the third latest PD Fourth latest "1st PD" data Fourth latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest PD Fifth latest "1st PD" data Fifth latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest PD Sixth latest "1st PD" data Sixth latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest PD Seventh latest "1st PD" data Seventh latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest PD Eighth latest "1st PD" data Eighth latest "2nd PD" data Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest PD CS

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

C

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

D

E

F

160
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9.3.8 QSD (SD LOGS)

A

The command QSD is for acquiring the data from the 8 latest shutdown (SD) logs. Command Format
[QSD]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function
To acquire data on the shutdown logs

Remarks
Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Latest SD data Latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the latest SD Second latest SD data Second latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the second latest SD Third latest SD data Third latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the third latest SD Fourth latest SD data Fourth latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest SD Fifth latest SD data Fifth latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest SD Sixth latest SD data Sixth latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest SD Seventh latest SD data Seventh latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest SD Eighth latest SD data Eighth latest SD subcategory data Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest SD CS

Data Length
3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 byte 2 Byte

Output Example
QSD (fixed) 1 0 00752013 5 0 00456378 2 3 00347845 2 4 00175635 1 0 00083450 2 2 00045662 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 7D

" SD data (Main)
0 1 2 3 4 No SD (Main) SQ_LSI communication error MDU-IIC communication error Abnormally in RST2 TEMP
B

" SD subcategory (SQ_LSI)
0 1 2 3 4 5 No SD-Sub data Communication error Drive stop BUSY Version mismatching (H/S) Version mismatching (M/S)
C

" SD subcategory (Main: MDU-IIC)
0 1 2 3 4 No SD-Sub data Main-EEPROM Backup-EEPROM DAC1 DAC2

" SD subcategory (Main: TEMP)
0 1 2 No SD-Sub data TEMP1 (high temperature) TEMP1 (low temperature)
D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

161

1

2

3

4

9.3.9 QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION)
Induce it peculiar, individual information is acquired.
A

Command Format
[QSE]

Effective Operation Modes
Every time

Function
Output of status

Remarks

Order
0 1 2 3
B

Part

Data Arrangement
Received Command name DTV Hardware Version DTV Hardware Serial DTV RUNTIME Version CFE Version KERNEL Version ROOTS Version FLAGS Information 1 FLAGS Information 2 FLAGS Information 3 FLAGS Information 4 FLAGS Information 5 FLAGS Information 6 HMG/HG Model Version User Password

Data Length
3 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 8 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 10 byte 4 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QSE 07080200 16777215 = 00K.22p 07.00d 2.4.2527 04.13d Y ∗ N Y N N 1.0.126 1234 13

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 −

C

Check Sum

9.3.10 QMT (TEMPERATURE / FAN ROTATION / ROOM LIGHT SENSOR)
D

Temperature information / FAN rotation state / Room light sensor information on the MTB side is returned. Command Format
[QMT]

Effective Operation Modes
Every time

Function
Output of status

Remarks
A/D value of MTB-side's temperature/FAN rotating status

Order
0
E

Part
− MTB

Data Arrangement
Received Command name A/D value of MTB-side Temperature MTB-side FAN rotating speed (0: STOP, 1: LOW, 2: HIGH) A/D value of room light sensor Level of room light sensor (Value: 1 to 5)

Data Length
3 byte 3 byte 1 byte 3 byte 1 byte QMT 267 1 009 5

Output Example

1 2 3 4

F

162
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9.3.11 QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB)

A

MTB side's shutdown information is acquired. Command Format
[QNG]

Effective Operation Modes
Every time

Function
Output of status

Remarks

Order
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 : 29 30 31 32 33

Part
− MTB

Data Arrangement
Received Command name 1st latest NG No. Subcategory No. for the 1st latest NG. MTB hour meter for the 1st latest NG. Reserved 2nd latest NG No. Subcategory No. for the 2nd latest NG. MTB hour meter for the 2nd latest NG. Reserved 3rd latest NG No. Subcategory No. for the 3rd latest NG. MTB hour meter for the 3rd latest NG. Reserved : 8th latest NG No. Subcategory No. for the 8th latest NG. MTB hour meter for the 8th latest NG. Reserved

Data Length
3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 7 byte 3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 7 byte 3 byte 1 byte 1 byte 7 byte 3 byte : 1 byte 1 byte 7 byte 3 byte 2 byte

Output Example
QNG 0 0 0000000 fixed on 000 0 0 0000000 fixed on 000 0 0 0000000 fixed on 000
C B

0 0 0000000 fixed on 000 00
D

Check Sum

< SD Information No. > Frequency *
5 6 7 8 9 10(A) 11(B) 12(C) 13(D) 14(E) 15(F) MTB part

Part

Part
Shutdown signal from audio amp. / short-circuit of speaker terminal Failure of communication with Module microcomputer 3-wire serial communication of Main microcomputer IIC communication failure of MTB side Communication failure of Main microcomputer Failure of FAN Abnormally in high temperature Failure of Digital Tuner Failure of Power Supply at MTB side Startup failure of Home Media Gallery Failure of Main EEPROM

Remarks (Operation)
Shutdown after 30 seconds warning Immediately Shutdown Go to No. 7 Subcategory Information Go to No. 8 Subcategory Information Immediately Shutdown Go to No. 10 Subcategory Information Shutdown after 30 seconds warning Go to No. 12 Subcategory Information Go to No. 13 Subcategory Information Immediately Shutdown
E

∗: Indicates the frequency of Blue LED flashing when the shutdown is occurred.

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

163

1

2

3

4

A

< No. 7 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 3-wire serial communication of Main microcomputer" > Value
1 2

< No. 10 Subcategory Information on "Abnormally in FAN" > Value
1 2

Shutdown Factor
Communication error of IF microcomputer Communication error of sequence processor

Remarks (Operation)
Shutdown Shutdown

Shutdown Factor
FAN 1 FAN 2 (FHD only)

Remarks (Operation)
Shutdown Shutdown

< No. 12 Subcategory Information on "Failure in Digital Tuner" > Value
1 2 4 7 8 9 C E G H I

B

< No. 8 Subcategory Information on "Failure in IIC communication of MTB side" > Value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Shutdown Factor
DTV starting failure DTV communication error Abnormmaly in BCM7038 Tuner 1 or 2 Card I/F IC VBI Slicer EEPROM TV Guide Home Gallery Middleware Application

Remarks (Operation)
Turn off the screen, then reset the device.

Shutdown Factor
Tuner 1 MSP/MAP AV Switch RGB Switch VDEC VDEC-SDRAM AD/PLL HDMI Tuner 2 US-MSP

Remarks (Operation)
Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown

C

8 A B

< No. 13 Subcategory Information on "Failure in Power supply at MTB side" > Value
1 2

Shutdown Factor
RST 2 RST 4

Remarks (Operation)
Shutdown Shutdown

D

E

F

164
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

9.3.12 QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA)
The command QSI is for acquiring all data on input video signals.
A

Command Format
[QSI]

Effective Operation Modes
All operations

Function
To acquire all data on input video signals

Remarks
Return data: 3 (ECO) + 66 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 71 Byte

Data Arrangement
ECO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Type of drive sequence Standard/nonstandard Type of ABL/WB tables Total value of PCN Total value of PRH Total value of PGH Total value of PBH Total value of PBR Total value of PRL Total value of PGL Total value of PBL Total value of ABL V frequency distinction Reserved Reserved APL acquiring data Number of SUS pulses Result of detection of still picture Result of detection of cracking in the panel Result of detection for scanning protection Result of detection for external protection Transition of protection operation Reserved CS

Data Length
3 Byte 3 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 1 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 4 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 4 Byte 2 Byte

Output Example
QSI (fixed) 60V S T1 0256 0256 0256 0256 0512 0512 0512 0512 128 6002 ∗ ∗∗∗∗ 1023 0457 1 1 1 1 1 ∗∗∗∗ 27

1: Type of Drive sequence
50V Video 50 Hz 60V Video 60 Hz 72V Video 72 Hz 75V Video 75 Hz 60P PC 60 Hz 70P PC 70 Hz

3: Type of ABL/WB tables
Tn n: 1 to 4

13: V frequency distinction
Reading value *100

B

16: APL acquiring data
Output with 10 bit 0 to 1023

2: Standard/ nonstandard
S N Standard Nonstandard

17: Number of SUS pulses
0174 to 2752

C

18 to 21: Each protection function
0 1 2 Setting: OFF Setting: ON (during wait) Setting: ON (during operation)

22: Transition of protection operations
0 1 2 3 Upper limit state for brightness Brightness being reduced Lower limit state for brightness Brightness being increased
D

9.3.13 DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF)
E

Drive ON/OFF: ON/OFF control of panel drive-power system Command Format
[DRV+S00] [DRV+S01]

Effective Operation Modes
Every time Every time DRIVE OFF

Function

Remarks

DRIVE ON (default)

Once the DRIVE OFF command is accepted, DRIVE OFF cannot be canceled by pressing the DRIVE OFF key again or by turning the unit off then back on with the STANDBY OFF/ON key. To cancel DRIVE OFF, restart the unit by unplugging then again plugging in the power cord.
F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

165

1

2

3

4

9.3.14 FAY / FAN (ADJ. COMMANDS PERMISSION / PROHIBITION)
The commands FAY/FAN are for prohibiting/permitting panel/MTB-adjustment commands.
A

Command Format
[FAY] [FAN]

Operation Effective Operation Modes
Normal operation mode while the power is on During FAY

Control
Adjustment command is valid. Adjustment command is invalid.

Remarks
For details, refer to the section “6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE”.

B

9.3.15 FAJ / UAJ / CBU / BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE)
When the DIGITAL Assy is to be replaced, adjustment values can be copied from the backup EEPROM to the EEPROM of the Assy for service.
C

Command Format
[FAJ] [UAJ]

Operation Effective Operation Modes Control
To make the flag setting that indicating that adjustment of the panel unit has been completed To make the flag setting that indicating that adjustment of the main unit has not been completed To make the flag setting that indicating that backup data have not been copied To copy Digital backup data to EEPROM The backup ROM is initialized.

Remarks
This takes at least 350 mS.

During FAY [CBU] [BCP]

D

E

F

166
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

A

B

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

167

1

2

3

4

10. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST
NOTES:
A

Parts marked by "NSP" are generally unavailable because they are not in our Master Spare Parts List. The mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part. Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation. Screws adjacent to mark on product are used for disassembly. For the applying amount of lubricants or glue, follow the instructions in this manual. (In the case of no amount instructions, apply as you think it appropriate.)

10.1 PACKING SECTION

B

C

D

E
Speed clamp ×3 Screw ×2

Bead band ×3

Plastic Band ×2

F

168
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

(1) PACKING SECTION PARTS LIST
Mark No. > 1 2 3 NSP 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NSP 11 NSP 12 13 14 Description Power Cord (2 m) Remote Control Unit Battery Cover Binder Assy Cleaning Cloth Operating Instructions (English, French, Spanish) Caution Card Cleaning Caution (U) Accessory Caution Warranty Card Card (Register) Polyethylene Bag Power Button Caution See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) Part No. ADG1215 AXD1550 AZN2680 AEC1908 AED1285 See Contrast table (2) Mark No. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Description After Image Caution Pad (508F-REG B-L) Pad (508F-REG B-R) Pad (508F-REG T-L) Pad (508F-REG T-R) Pad (508F-REG ACC) Under Carton Upper Carton (5010FD) Packing Sheet L Band Assy Speaket System HDMI Caution ••••• Parental Caution See Contrast table (2) Part No. See Contrast table (2) AHA2632 AHA2633 AHA2634 AHA2635 AHA2675 See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) AXY1192 SMW1985 See Contrast table (2)
B A

Alkaline Dry Cell Battery (LR6, AA) VEM1023

(2) CONTRAST TABLE PDP-5010FD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following:
Mark No. Symbol and Description PDP-5010FD /KUCXC ARE1472 ARM1239 ARM1303 ARM1304 ARY1196 ARY1156 AHG1394 Not used ARM1360 ARM1351 AHD3588 Not used AHD3624 AHG1389 Not used ARM1373 ARM1371 PDP-5010FD /KUC ARE1487 ARM1232 ARM1283 ARM1362 ARY1138 VRY1132 Not used AHG1340 ARM1363 ARM1361 Not used AHD3571 AHD3623 Not used AHG1405

C

7 Operating Instructions (English, French, Spanish) 8 Caution Card 9 Cleaning Caution (U) 10 Accessory Caution
NSP NSP NSP

11 Warranty Card 12 Card (Register) 13 Polyethylene Bag 13 Vinyl Bag 14 Power Button Caution 15 After Image Caution 21 Under Carton (508) 21 Under Carton (5010FD) 22 Upper Carton (5010FD) 23 Packing Sheet L 23 Packing Sheet 26 HDMI Caution 28 Parental Caution

D

E

ARM1374 ARM1372

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

169

1

2

3

4

10.2 REAR SECTION

A

B

C

C

C

D

MAIN CN4109 MAIN CN4110 (USB)

A B CN8801 CN8802 TANSHI

E

A B

F

Refer to "10.3 FRONT SECTION".

170
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

(1) REAR SECTION PARTS LIST
Mark No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 > 16 Description SIDE IO Assy SIDE KEY Assy USB Cable (J301) Side Input Panel (8U) Function Button Base Side Input Shield Function Button Shield Coil Spring Spacer PCB Spacer Reuse Wire Saddle Locking Card Spacer Reuse Wire Saddle USB Spacer A Inner Grip Assy Gasket (J-TYPE) Name Label Serial Seal Caution Label Label A (U) Part No. AWW1274 AWW1275 ADF1034 ANC2457 See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) ABH1125 AEC1288 AEC1570 AEC1945 AEC2019 AEC2118 AED1317 See Contrast table (2) ANK1956 See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) AAX3478 Mark No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Description Label C (U) Label B50 (U) Terminal Panel B (50U) Power Button Case (508F) Function Button Panel Side Input Cover Function Button Power Button (508F) Function Button Sheet (8U) Input Cover Label 8U Rear Case (508F) Cushion ••••• Screw (3 x 40P) Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw ABA1332 ABA1341 AMZ30P060FTB AMZ30P080FTC APZ30P080FTB BPZ30P080FTB TBZ40P080FTB
C

Part No. AAX3501 AAX3540 ANC2452 AAK2908 AMB2906 AMB2911 AAC1562 AAD4152 AAK2919 AAX3509 ANE1662 AEB1489
B A

NSP 17 NSP 18 19 20

BBZ30P060FTB BPZ30P100FTB

(2) CONTRAST TABLE PDP-5010FD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following:
Mark No. Symbol and Description PDP-5010FD /KUCXC ANG3066 ANK1938 ANK1939 AMR3693 AAL2934 Not used AAX3182 Not used AAX3534 Not used PDP-5010FD /KUC ANG2923 ANK1834 ANK1835 AMR3434 Not used AAL2997 Not used AAX3143 Not used AAX3533

D

5 Function Button Base 6 Side Input Shield 7 Function Button Shield 15 Inner Grip Assy
NSP NSP NSP

17 Name Label (508REG) 17 Name Label (508REG-J) 18 Serial Seal 18 Serial Sheet 19 Caution Label U 19 Caution Label E

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

171

1

2

3

4

10.3 FRONT SECTION

A

Refer to "10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)".

B

MAIN CN4107

C

D

MAIN CN4109

E

F

Rear view

172
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

FRONT SECTION PARTS LIST
Mark No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NSP 9 NSP 10 11 12 13 Description FHD IR Assy 50FHD LED Assy FHD RLS Assy Blind Cushion (508F) Nylon Rivet Rivet 1..Front Case Assy (508FU) 2..Panel Cushion H (50) 2..Panel Cushion V (50) ••••• FC Gate Sheet Screw AMR3746 ABZ30P080FTC Part No. AWW1289 AWW1291 AWW1292 AEB1479 AEC1671 AEC1877 AMB3001 AED1257 AED1258
B A

6P/6P/3P Housing Wire (J117) ADX3562

C

D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

173

1

2

3

4

10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)

A

Refer to "10.7 MULTI BASE SECTION". Cleaning liquid : GEM1004 Cleaning paper : GED-008

B

C

FHD FAN CONNECT CN9555 FHD FAN CONNECT CN9553

D
FHD FAN CONNECT CN9554

MAIN CN4103

E

F

Refer to "10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)".

POWER SUPPLY P10

174
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

(1) CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) PARTS LIST
Mark No. 1 2 3 > > 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description FHD POWER SW Assy Ferrite Core (L1) Housing Wire (J103) Fan Motor 80 x 25L DC Fan Motor 80 x 25L Front Chassis VL (508F) Front Chassis VR (508F) Sub Frame L Assy 507 Sub Frame R Assy 507 Part No. AWW1293 ATX1044 ADX3552 AXM1058 AXM1064 AMA1027 AMA1028 See Contrast table (2) See Contrast table (2) Mark No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Description Sub Frame Plate Floating Rubber 80 Ferrite Core Holder Reuse Wire Saddle Ferrite Clamp Reuse Wire Saddle Fan Holder Gasket ADH-FCH ••••• ••••• Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw See Contrast table (2) ABZ30P080FTC AMZ30P060FTB APZ30P080FTB PPZ50P100FTB TBZ40P080FTB ABA1364
B

Part No. ANG3046 AEB1427 AEC1818 AEC1945 AEC1986 AEC2118 AMR3704 ANK1850
A

Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy ANA2092 Front Chassis HB Assy (50) Panel Holder V1 (50) Panel Holder V2 (50) Fan Holder Multi Base Holder ANA2094 ANG2770 ANG2771 ANG2833 ANG2937

C

(2) CONTRAST TABLE PDP-5010FD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following:
Mark No. Symbol and Description PDP-5010FD /KUCXC ANA2080 ANA2081 ABA1313 PDP-5010FD /KUC ANA1945 ANA1946 ABA1351
D

8 Sub Frame L Assy 507 9 Sub Frame R Assy 507 26 Screw

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

175

1

2

3

4

10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)

A

I

H

J

MAIN CN4101 G

X

A

B

W

F

B

E C MAIN CN4105 MAIN CN4106 U TANSHI Y CN8806 X V

D

C

U

Q R L K Y S FHD POWER SW CN9571 W N M O Q I L K R H S G MAIN CN4113 Fan×3 P AC Inlet E V T

J

D

E

F M A T

N

B

O

C

F

P

D

Refer to "10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION".

176
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

(1) CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) PARTS LIST
Mark No. 1 2 3 4 5 > 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Description 50F X DRIVE Assy 50F Y DRIVE Assy PANEL SENSOR Assy 50F DIGITAL Assy FHD FAN CONNECT Assy POWER SUPPLY Unit Ferrite Core (F1 - F8) Three Pieces Connector 40P Flexible Cable (J201) Flexible Cable (J202) Flexible Cable (J203) Flexible Cable (J204) Flexible Cable (J205) Flexible Cable (J206) Flexible Cable (J207) Flexible Cable (J208) Flexible Cable (J209) Flexible Cable (J210) Flexible Cable (J211) 5P Housing Wire (J105) Housing Wire (J126) 9P&7P Housing Wire (J101) 8P&8P Housing Wire (J102) 14P Housing Wire (J104) 6P&6P Housing Wire (J108) Part No. AWV2510 AWV2511 AWW1309 AWW1316 AWW1290 AXY1168 ATX1048 AKM1384 ADD1498 ADD1499 ADD1500 ADD1501 ADD1502 ADD1503 ADD1504 ADD1505 ADD1506 ADD1507 ADD1508 ADX3359 ADX3545 ADX3550 ADX3551 ADX3553 ADX3556 Mark No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Description 6P&6P Housing Wire (J109) 6P&6P Housing Wire (J111) 6P&6P Housing Wire (J112) Conductive Plate Y Nylon Rivet Wire Saddle Flat Clamp Ferrite Clamp Side Type Mini Clamp PCB Spacer (Reuse) Reuse Wire Saddle Reuse HL 28 PCB Spacer (Reuse) Drive Silicone Drive Sheet A Drive Sheet B ••••• ••••• Screw Screw See Contrast table (2)
C

Part No. ADX3557 ADX3558 ADX3559 ANG3050 AEC1671 AEC1745 AEC1879 AEC1986 AEC2003 AEC2087 AEC2118 AEC2119 AEC2122 AEH1139 AMR3697 AMR3698
B A

3P&3P&3P Housing Wire (J123)ADX3565

ABA1364

D

(2) CONTRAST TABLE PDP-5010FD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following:
Mark No. 45 Screw Symbol and Description PDP-5010FD /KUCXC ABA1313 PDP-5010FD /KUC ABA1351

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

177

1

2

3

4

10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION

A

B

C

D

E

F

178
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

(1) PANEL CHASSIS SECTION PARTS LIST
Mark No. NSP 1 NSP 2 NSP 3 NSP 4 NSP 5 NSP 6 NSP 7 NSP 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Description Panel Chassis (F) Assy 50F ADDRESS L Assy 50F ADDRESS S Assy 50F SCAN A Assy 50F SCAN B Assy 50F SCAN C Assy 50F SCAN D Assy Plasma Panel (50F) Assy PCB Spacer (Reuse) PCB Spacer (Reuse) Heat Radiation Sheet Conductive Plate Holder Address Plate (50F) A Address Plate (50F) B Conductive Plate X (F) Screw Screw Three Pieces Connector 40P Gasket AD Screw Part No. AWU1234 AWW1310 AWW1311 AWW1312 AWW1313 AWW1314 AWW1315 AWU1235 AEC2087 AEC2122 AEH1134 AMR3446 ANG3048 ANG3071 ANG2906 ABA1351 ABA1364 AKM1384 ANK1948 See Contrast table (2)
C B A

(2) CONTRAST TABLE PDP-5010FD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following:
Mark No. 20 Screw Symbol and Description PDP-5010FD /KUCXC ABA1313 PDP-5010FD /KUC ABA1351
D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

179

1

2

3

4

10.7 MULTI BASE SECTION

A
50FHD LED CN9671 SIDE KEY CN9501 FHD IR CN9731 FHD RLS CN9781

50F DIGITAL CN3201 POWER P9 P8

C D B USB (side)

E

B
Fan FHD FAN CONNECT CN9551

A

F

E D POWER P5

C

B POWER P3

C

A

D

SIDE IO CN9352 SIDE IO CN9351 F

E

F

180
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

MULTI BASE SECTION PARTS LIST
Mark No.
>

Description MAIN Assy TANSHI Assy POD Assy Power Switch (S1 : TRAP) AC Inlet (CN1) Flexible Cable (J212) Flexible Cable (J213) Flexible Cable (J214, J215) 5P Housing Wire (J107) 11/6/4P Housing Wire (J114) ••••• 11P Housing Wire (J118) 8P/4P Housing Wire (J119) 7P Housing Wire (J125) 3P Housing Wire (J127) ••••• Locking Card Spacer Wire Saddle Reuse Wire Saddle Silicone Sheet Audio POD Cover Multi Base Assy (U) Terminal Panel A (U) POD Stay A ••••• Gasket UD Hex. Head Screw Washer Faced Nut Screw Screw 6P Housing Wire (J115) 4P Housing Wire (J122)

Part No. AWV2457 AWW1334 AWW1295 ASG1089 AKP1322 ADD1441 ADD1491 ADD1519 ADX3555 ADX3560 ADX3563 ADX3531 ADX3566 ADX3546 AEC1429 AEC1745 AEC1945
C B A

1 2 3

> >

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

12P&15P Housing Wire (J106) ADX3554

AEH1143 AMR3542 ANA2102 ANC2440 ANG2933

ANK1883 BBA1051 BBN1005 BMZ30P060FTB PMB30P080FNI ADX3561 ADX3564
D

E

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

181

1

2

3

4

10.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F (AWU1272)

A

Exterior Section

B

C

D

E

F

182
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

Packing Section
A

Refer to the “• Exterior Section” for the mounting position.
B

C

PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F PARTS LIST
Mark No. NSP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 NSP 18 19 NSP 20 21 22 23 24 25 Description Panel Chassis (F) Assy Front Chassis VL (508F) Front Chassis VR (508F) Sub Frame L Assy 507 Sub Frame R Assy 507 Part No. AWU1234 AMA1027 AMA1028 ANA1945 ANA1946 Mark No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Description Screw Screw ••••• ••••• ••••• Caution Label Vinyl Bag S ••••• Service Pad Pad (508F T-L) Pad (508F T-R) Pad (508F B-L) Pad (508F B-R) Under Carton (508F) Upper Carton (508F service) Protect Sheet AEC2105 AHA2683 AHA2684 AHA2685 AHA2686 AHD3622 AHD3637 AHG1331
E

Part No. APZ30P080FTB TBZ40P080FTB

Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy ANA2092 Front Chassis HB Assy (50) Conductive Plate X (F) Sub Frame Plate Address Plate (50F) A Address Plate (50F) B Rivet Ferrite Clamp Side Type Mini Clamp PCB Spacer (Reuse) Gasket ADH-FCH Gasket AD Front Case (508F) Rear Case (508F) Drive Voltage Label Screw (3 x 40P) Screw Screw Screw Screw ANA2094 ANG2906 ANG3046 ANG3048 ANG3071 AEC1877 AEC1986 AEC2003 AEC2122 ANK1850 ANK1948 AMB3000 ANE1662 ARW1097 ABA1332 ABA1351 ABA1364 ABZ30P080FTC AMZ30P060FTB

AAX3031 AHG1338

D

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

183

1

2

3

4

10.9 TABLE TOP STAND

A

B

Front Bottom view Rear

C

D

TABLE TOP STAND PARTS LIST
Mark No. 1 2
E

Description Base Cover Assy Stand Pipe L Assy Stand Pipe R Assy Screw Screw (M8 x 23) Screw (M8 x 40)

Part No. AXY1176 AXY1182 AXY1183 ABA1357 ABA1371 ABA1373

3 4 5 6

F

184
1 2

PDP-5010FD
3 4

5

6

7

8

10.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING)
A

Up

B

×2
C

D

SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) PARTS LIST
Mark No. NSP 1 2 3 NSP 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NSP 11 12 13 14 15 NSP 16 Description 1..Accessory Set 2..Speaker Wire 2..Polyethylene Bag S1 2..Screw Set 3..Screw 3..Polyethylene Bag S0 1..Bracket Assy (S) 2..Gasket 2..Gasket 2..Gasket 2..Bracket LR 1..Bracket Assy (C) 2..Gasket 2..Gasket 2..Gasket 2..Bracket C Part No. SME3775 SDS1202 SHL1439 SME3696 BMZ50P100FTB SHL1438 22 SXG1127 SED1136 SED1138 SED1166 SNA1481 NSP 27 SXG1128 SED1140 SED1141 SED1167 SNA1482
F

Mark No. 17 18 19 20 21

Description ••••• Protector (Side) Protector (C-T) Protector (C-M) Protector (C-B) Protection Sheet S3 Protection Sheet S1 Packing Case Packing Bag S2 Polyethylen Bag S0 CS Assy Serial Label

Part No. SHA2577 SHA2578 SHA2579 SHA2580 SHC1846 SHC1847 SHG2780 SHL1450 SHL1451 SMW1987 SRW1112
E

23 24 25 26

NSP 28

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

185

F

E

B

A

D

C

186
(Top) TW WF WF TW (Top) Baffle (Front) (Top) Input Terminal Input Terminal Tweeter TW WF Baffle (back) (Top) TW FW

Cabinet (inside)

10.11 CS ASSY

1

1

TW

WF WF

TW

Grille (Front)

Section: A
2

2

PDP-5010FD

Rear

3

3

Grille (back)

4

4

5

6

7

8

CS ASSY PARTS LIST
Mark No. 1 2 NSP 3 NSP 4 NSP 5 NSP 6 7 8 Description Speaker Speaker Baffle Cabinet Assy C Cabinet Assy L Cabinet Assy R Grille 1..Network Assy 2..Capacitor 1.5 2..Choke Coil 0.68 NSP 9 NSP 10 11 NSP 12 NSP 13 NSP 14 NSP 15 16 NSP 17 18 NSP 19 NSP 20 NSP 21 NSP 22 NSP 23 NSP 24 NSP 25 NSP 26 27 28 29 30 NSP 31 NSP 32 NSP 33 NSP 34 NSP 35 NSP 36 NSP 37 NSP 38 NSP 39 NSP 40 NSP 41 NSP 42 43 Gasket Gasket Packing Blinder Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Gasket Felt Felt Tape Tape Tape Input Terminal MDF Bar Paper Tube 26 Acoustic Absorbent Acoustic Absorbent Acoustic Absorbent Acoustic Absorbent Acoustic Absorbent Acoustic Absorbent Acoustic Absorbent Model Label Caution Label Serial Label ••••• Part No. H132DC65-51D FK26AP32-55H SNK2980 SXG1122 SXG1123 SXG1124 SMG1886 SWN1787 SCE1034 STH1266 SEB1299 SEB1300 SEB1302 SEB1304 SEB1315 SEB1316 SEC2074 SEC2076 SEC2078 SEC2083
C B

Mark No. 44 45 46 47 48 49

Description Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw

Part No. BPZ30P080FTC BPZ35P080FTC BPZ35P120FTB BPZ35P120FTC BPZ35P140FTB BPZ40P350FTC
A

SEC2092 SEC2093 SEC2113 SEC2114 SEC2150 SEC2142 SED1127 SED1130 SEH1089 SEH1099 SEH1117 SKX1098 SLX1165 SMR1403 SMT1331 SMT1333 SMT1335 SMT1328 SMT1357 SMT1358 SMT1359 SAN3955 SRR1024 SRW1111
E D

F

PDP-5010FD
5 6 7 8

187

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful